Home

Manual - Optimum Data Inc.

1. 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Average Latency MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx Frames Exceeding CIR MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtDiciTxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1011 Rx Utilization MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag ifInOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 16 I Tx Utilization MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag ifOutOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Frames Received MIB FT DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary C 23 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table C 7 Object ID Cross Reference 3 of 3 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Frames Sent MIB FT DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx CIR Utilization MIB FT DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx DLCI Link Utilization MIB FT DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx DLCI Link Utilization MIB FT DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx FECNs MIB FT DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FT DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs C 24 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments Rear Panels 9124 A2 GH30 00 This appendix sh
2. Network CIR bps is automatically determined from LMI status update message if switch provides this information Otherwise the port rate is configured Port 1 CIR bps is set to the network DLCI s CIR Committed Burst Size Bc Bits is set to the network DLCI s CIR Excess Burst Size Be Bits is set to the network port rate minus the network DLCI s CIR DLCI Priority is set to High For PVC Connection PVC Connections information see Table 8 10 Source Link set to Port 1 Pe eerie pune Source DLCI is automatically created from the LMI status response message Source EDLC is left blank Primary Destination Link is set to Net1 FR1 Primary Destination DLCI is automatically created from the network source DLCI Primary Destination EDLCI is set to 0 Port 1 data 1 The port rate is calculated at the time of discovery as the number of DSOs allocated to frame relay It is automatically configured once for each DLCI Should the number of DSOs change this value must be manually recalculated and changed via the Configuration branch 3 When non FrameSaver units are at the other end of the PVC connection change the network DLCI Type setting to Standard before sending data 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 15 Configuration Automatic Configuration for Selected Frame Relay Discovery Mode 4 of 4 If the mode selected is NetOnly For DLCI R
3. FrameSaver FrameSaver 9124 9624 Unit Unit Fale Router 98 15873 FrameSaver Unit Diagnostic and statistical information is continuously collected every 15 minutes for 24 hours by the FrameSaver SLV units with daily totals for up to 5 days This information continues to be collected even when frequent communication with the management station is not possible or desired due to bandwidth restrictions or network outages As a result the NMS application does not have to use networking bandwidth and CPU time to repeatedly query the remote FrameSaver unit for information reducing network load and maximizing use of the information collected FrameSaver units can also respond to multiple managers and each manager can pick and choose from the information collected selecting and collecting only the information that is important to them through internal thresholds in the NetScout NMS 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 3 5 Typical Applications Access to Frame Relay Network The following configuration shows typical access to the frame relay service using FrameSaver SLV units or fractional T1 with each FrameSaver unit connected to a frame relay router Token Ring Frame Relay FrameSaver 9624 Router Unit Frame i 5 Rela rameoaver Router 9124 Frame Relay Unit C 1 5M T1 Network _ Frame T Relay aj Physical Connection FrameSaver PVC Connection a 24 Ethernet nit 98 15869
4. Health and Status Self Test Results Test Status see page 10 12 Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status DLCls Status and CIR Kbps see page 10 20 m PVC Connection Status Source and Destination Links DLCls EDLCls and connection status see page 10 21 m Time Slot Assignment Status see page 10 22 NOTE Status messages contained in the following sections are in alphabetical order 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 10 11 Operation and Maintenance System and Test Status Messages System and test status information is selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status gt System and Test Status The following information is included on this screen Self Test Results Messages on page 10 12 m Health and Status Messages on page 10 13 Test Status Messages on page 10 18 Self Test Results Messages These self test result messages appear in the Self Test Results field at the top of the System and Test Status screen Table 10 5 Self Test Results Messages Message What It Indicates What To Do Failure XXXXXXXX An internal failure occurred 1 Record the failure code XXXXXXXX represents an 8 digit hexadecimal failure 2 Reset the unit code for use by service 3 Contact your service personnel representative Passed No problems were found No action needed during power up or reset 10 12 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance Health and Sta
5. amp CO Force LSD on amp D2 Drop the connection when the unit drops DTR amp S0 Force DSR on amp R1 Ignore RTS DO Force CTS on S0 1 Automatically answer incoming calls 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary D 5 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments Port 1 Connector The following table provides the pin assignments for the 34 position V 35 connector to the DTE 34 Pin Signal ITU CT Direction Socket Shield 101 A Signal Ground Common 102 B Request to Send RTS 105 To DSU In Data Set Ready DSR 107 From DSU Out E Receive Line Signal Detector 109 From DSU Out F RLSD or LSD Data Terminal Ready DTR 108 1 2 To DSU In H Local Loopback LL Transmit Data TXD 103 To DSU In P A S B Receive Data RXD 104 From DSU Out R A T B Transmit Signal Element Timing 113 To DSU In U A DTE Source XTXC or TT W B Receive Signal Element Timing 115 From DSU Out DCE Source RXC A B Transmit Signal Element Timing From DSU Out A DCE Source TXC A B Test Mode Indicator TM From DSU Out NN XxX lt P gt Wey lt D gt D 6 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments Standard V 35 Straight through Cable A standard V 35 straight through cable can be used to connect a DTE port toa DTE where a 34 pin plug type connector is needed for the data port anda 34 position socket type c
6. 10 40 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting 9124 A2 GH30 00 This chapter includes the following Problem Indicators on page 11 2 Resetting the Unit on page 11 3 Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu on page 11 3 Resetting the Unit By Cycling Power on page 11 3 Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit on page 11 4 Alarms on page 11 5 Troubleshooting Tables on page 11 9 Device Problems on page 11 9 Frame Relay PVC Problems on page 11 11 Tests Available on page 11 12 Test Timeout feature on page 11 13 Changing the Test Timeout from OpenLane Diagnostic Wizard on page 11 14 Starting and Stopping a Test on page 11 15 Aborting All Tests on page 11 16 Determining Test Status and Results on page 11 16 PVC Tests on page 11 16 PVC Loopback on page 11 17 Send Pattern on page 11 18 Monitor Pattern on page 11 18 Connectivity on page 11 18 May 1999 Preliminary 11 1 Troubleshooting m Physical Tests on page 11 19 Line Loopback on page 11 19 Payload Loopback on page 11 20 Repeater Loopback on page 11 21 Send Line Loopback on page 11 22 Send and Monitor Pattern Tests on page 11 23 DTE Loopback on page 11 24 P Ping Test on page 11 25 Lamp Test on page 11 27 LMI Packet Utility on page 11 28 i Problem Indicators The system provides a number of indicators to alert you to possible prob
7. Configuration Table 8 4 T1 Network Physical Options 2 of 4 Line Coding Format Possible Settings AMI B8ZS Default Setting BBZS Specifies the line coding format for the network interface AMI Uses Alternate Mark Inversion AMI line coding format B8ZS Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS line coding format Line Build Out LBO Possible Settings 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Default Setting 0 0 Specifies the line build out for the signal transmitted to the network 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Specifies line build out in dB Bit Stuffing Possible Settings 62411 Disable Default Setting 62411 Determines the type of bit insertion to provide ones density requirements for data transmitted to the network Display Conditions This option does not appear when Line Coding Format is set to B8ZS 62411 Inserts a one in the data after 15 consecutive zeros are received or the density of ones falls below 12 5 This setting complies with AT amp T TR 62411 but is not recommended for frame relay data because it inserts errors in the data traffic Disable Disables bit stuffing Ones density is not enforced on data sent to the network Network Initiated LLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the line loopback LLB to be controlled by the receipt of LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands from the network E
8. Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated Applies only to the user side of the UNI 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated inclusive LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 10 Configures the LMI defined T1 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies only to the user side of the UNI 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies only to the network side of the UNI 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 parameter which is the interval time in seconds that the Network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum status enquiry messages received N4 from the User side Applies only when L
9. EDT Pe pe T ri eee LF Ce ee en ad IL ILIES hi FEA LL Ieee Lid I eh os ELIE iret ii ihi j kin oe iLE Cuby Mamk Value tre Gm meras LS ei et ed eet et DI Li DES id CETE r Le a LL ee eee ha TE Ex pinnation of the chart abe May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 7 14 Concord s Network Health IT Manager Service Level Report Using this report you can compare service level performance of various groups The report summarizes service levels for a group of DLCls along with details on individual DLCls within that group Memo Vahima far All p eae birth Pe bees LAAN Tire bai ik Daly Haih Exo priors Bry Domp E a i a i T f MERALAR NI FF bee es F d Tira ke rik Lanes Te karin LEAT aT Lupa ra FL n T aai earner T za Pais OLEI ii T a Caiu Tolugai OLE i Tal OE DEE ee Laps Tatas OLEON Tii Bilis TaLi LCL Tes Lat pa Aer OL T 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 7 15 Concord s Network Health Customer Service Level Report This report is used to provide service level information to service customers to help them determine optimum service levels needed based upon their own traffic data as well as provide documented evidence for increasing CIR It combines daily volume daily Health exceptions bandwidth distribution average Health Index ratings and availability for each DLCI onto a single page Deity Valera per Ebene
10. Error fault alarm conditions Out of Frame OOF Loss of Signal LOS a Alarm Indication Signal AIS Exceeded Error Rate EER Yellow Alarm Signal Device Fail a Self Test Failed Power Supply Failure LMI Down DLCI Down Network Communication Link Down m CTS Down m DTR Down m Primary or Secondary Clock Failed No failures have been detected Loopback or test pattern in progress initiated locally remotely or from the network 10 4 May 1999 Preliminary No tests are active 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 10 2 Network or DSX Interface LEDs A recoverable signal is present on the Network DSX interface The signal cannot be recovered from the Network DSX interface An LOS condition exists Out of Frame At least one OOF was detected during the sampling period No OOFs were detected during the sampling period Yellow An alarm condition is present on the network DSX interface Current alarm conditions Loss of Signal LOS Loss of Frame LOF Out of Frame OOF Excessive Error Rate EER Yellow Alarm Signal Alarm Indication Signal AIS No alarm condition is present on the Network DSX interface Table 10 3 Data Port Interface LEDs Label Indication Color What It Means Operational ON The interchange circuits for the port Status are in the correct state to transmit and receive data OFF The port is idle Occurs
11. If an Alternate Dial Out Directory is specified the alarm directory s telephone number is number is called see the Control menu s Modem Call Directories Disable Does not retry an incomplete call Dial Out Delay Time Min Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 5 Specifies the amount of time between call retries when an SNMP trap message is sent the wait between call attempts see Call Retry 1 10 Sets the number of minutes for the delay between call retry attempts inclusive Alternate Dial Out Directory Possible Settings None 1 5 Default Setting None Specifies whether an incomplete call busy or no answer etc resulting from an attempt to send an SNMP trap message is retried using an alternate telephone number Up to 5 alternate call directories can be set up but only one at a time can be used When Call Retry is enabled the alarm directory s telephone number is called first If the J call cannot be completed after one additional try then the specified alternate directory s telephone number is called None Does not dial out using one of the alternate directory telephone numbers 1 5 Specifies the call directory containing the telephone number to call if a call cannot be completed using the telephone number in the alarm directory Directory Number A in the Control menu s Modem Call Directories inclusive May 1999 Preliminary 8 71 Configurati
12. Send Pattern page 11 18 Data Port PVC Tests m Monitor Pattern page 11 18 Connectivity page 11 19 Physical Tests Network Physical Tests Line Loopback page 11 19 Payload Loopback page 11 20 Repeater Loopback page 11 21 m Send Line Loopback page 11 22 Send Pattern page 11 18 Monitor Pattern page 11 18 Data Port Physical Tests DTE Loopback page 11 24 DSX 1 Physical Tests Line Loopback page 11 19 m Payload Loopback page 11 20 Repeater Loopback page 11 21 Send Pattern page 11 18 Monitor Pattern page 11 18 Other Tests IP Ping IP PING page 11 25 Lamp Test LEDs test page 11 27 1 Menu selections for PVC Tests are suppressed when no PVCs have been defined for the interface May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting Test Timeout A Test Timeout feature is available to automatically terminate a test as opposed to manually terminating a test after it has been running a specified period of time It is recommended that this feature be used when the FrameSaver unit is remotely managed through an inband data stream PVC If a test is accidently commanded to execute on the interface providing management access control is regained when the specified time period expires automatically terminating the test To use this feature enable the Test Timeout configuration option and set a duration for the test to run in the Test Duration min configuration option see Configuring General System Opti
13. Trami Lee Bossa T n mon m i Pri sj pere t BLE W i 4 LE E eed T The 4 a re 4 ETTE wed Ha 4 ee rea 4 Phin ite 4 Daly Health Eecepliers pir Elect TE a LFE am ar ee Bin meh au oa i 5 Er i a las tani ee s i LER TUT Miia Pat IEE EE Tha rin Tis Tire i Pe ea Leran i Ta De eae ree Taa De n Le eee simis iane eel ed de E tae Lee ee eee Le opel NI ia LP Le ee The rest of this report is on the next page 7 16 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Concord s Network Health Average Health Irika Tie 18 Cirern henge cea HM iora Pee ee a e e Largu i Tapai H ea Cipla Fiat ee ed a fT ee Pec df oT od ea Liria Te a a Lar Charmer eee Lr Pl Large et i ee SL Sheil Lied OMT E i ey H E T a a ree ea dee Ld ei a Le Le ee A een ee i LI a EG ET Jemari Ca ree ea Lar eee Che Fg Lid 0 Te Eee Con ple ore Ol Ge chia aioe See LAN WAN Service Customer Report in the Network Health Reports Guide for information about this report 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 7 17 Concord s Network Health At a Glance Reports These reports consolidate a frame relay circuits performance over a specified period onto single page summaries Use this report to compare the DLCI s volume and utilization to the network performance indicators At a Glance Report W
14. pidu Si on ao i moo ar EDET joou 1 89 a Bi o AUNDE Longua A00 ti ia ng Oh tt a nt l J3 Cite inti Ti an dae 4 ii Deir iLE 9124 A2 GH30 00 Concord s Network Health Leaders Summary Report The following chart and tables list the ten highest volume DLCls High traffic volume may be increasing latency and the high Health Index rating indicates problems It is a good idea to run these reports daily so a norm can be established The same DLCls should appear Use this chart and table to alert you to possible problems Problems to look for include Anormally high volume DLCI is dropped from the list Anew DLCI appears on the list Check Element Summaries ADLCl has a high Health Index rating but low volume Significant differences between a DLCI s average and peak Health Index rating Cea ratory tLe prt DIL a Teal Hipu iM a M aT a Fai LEITH Toii owe IELI f ro za mis 31t 18 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 7 11 Concord s Network Health Elements Summary Report 7 12 Use this report for DLCI detail information and comparison Several views of these charts are available Use this chart to identify DLCls with above or below average volume and investigate When there are any significant changes investigate the cause Elemeni Wobma va Basalina bry Weak cna TD dee Te ee T Cond aa Teer obec Lee pre Pe ae
15. Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do The communication link for Check the router connected to the COM port is down and the COM port the COM port is configured for Net Link An Out of Frame OOF For the network or DSX 1 condition has been interface detected on the interface An OOF condition is 1 Check that the cable is securely attached at both ends Network Com Link Down OOF at Network 1 declared when two out of four frame synchronization bits are in error Check that the framing format for the interface is correct This condition clears when a reframe occurs Contact your network provider Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends Primary Clock Failed A failure of the configured primary clock source for the unit was detected and the secondary clock is providing the timing for the unit 2 Contact your network provider This condition clears when the configured primary clock is restored A failure of both clock sources configured for the unit was detected Primary amp Secondary Clocks Failed This condition only applies to T1 network and DSX 1 interfaces It clears when the configured primary clock is restored Secondary Clock Failed A failure of the configured secondary clock source for the unit was detected and the internal clock is providing the
16. Node IP Address Uses the IP address contained in the Node IP Address see Table 8 11 Node IP Options Special 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Allows you to display edit an IP address for the unit s management PVC when the IP address for this interface is different from the node s IP address May 1999 Preliminary 8 57 Configuration 8 58 Table 8 12 Management PVC Options 2 of 4 Intf Subnet Mask Possible Settings Node Subnet Mask Calculate Special nnn nnn nnn nnn Default Setting Node Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit when the management PVC is providing connectivity to an external IP network through frame relay that requires a specific subnet mask for the interface Node Subnet Mask Uses the nterface IP Subnet contained in the Node Subnet Mask configuration option see Table 8 11 Node IP Options Calculate Calculates the subnet mask created by the IP protocol based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Cannot be displayed or edited Special 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Allows you to edit display the subnet mask for the management PVC when the subnet mask is different for this interface A text field displays where you can enter the subnet mask for this units management PVC Set DE Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Spe
17. The base rate is 56 kbps May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 8 Frame Relay and LMI Options 4 of 4 Network Initiated DCLB Possible Settings Disable V 54 ANSI FT1 Both Default Setting Both Allows the initiation and termination of the Data Channel Loopback DCLB V 54 loop 2 to be controlled by the receipt of a DCLB actuate or DCLB release sequence either V 54 or FT1 ANSI compliant from the network When enabled this option causes a NextEDGE device to initiate a DCLB on the DSOs allocated to this frame relay link when a DCLB actuate sequence is received Display Conditions This option only appears for the network interface Disable The DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences are ignored for this frame relay link V 54 DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with V 54 standard for Inter DCE signaling for point to point circuits will be recognized and will control initiation and termination of a DCLB V 54 Loop 2 for this frame relay link ANSI_FT1 DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with ANSI 11 403 Annex B standard for In band signaling for fractional T1 FT1 channel loopbacks will be recognized and will control initiation and termination of a DCLB for this frame relay link Both DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with either V 54 or ANSI 11 403 Annex B standard will be recognized and will control initi
18. Use the Device Name screen to name the system and to change or display the general SNMP system name location and contact for the unit B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Control gt System Information 2 Move the cursor to the field Tab to the field or press the arrow keys where you want to add or change information The following information is available for viewing Use the right and left arrow keys to scroll additional text into view If the selection is Enter the Device Name Unique name for device identification of up to 20 characters System Name SNMP system name can be up to 255 characters System Location System s physical location can be up to 255 characters System Contact Name and how to contact the system person can be up to 255 characters Date Current date in the month day year format mm dd yyyy Current time in the hours minutes format hh mm NOTE To clear existing information place the cursor in the Clear field Tab to the Clear field and press Enter 3 Press Ctrl a and Save your entriesSetting Up LoginsSee Chapter 9 Security and Logins to set up and administer logins 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 5 Configuration Basic Configuration Configuration option settings determine how the FrameSaver unit operates Use the FrameSaver unit s Configuration menu to display or change configuration option settings See Chap
19. 5 Press Crtl a and Save the DLCI Record 8 46 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration B gt Procedure To change DLCI records 1 Select the desired DLCI records 2 Select Modify to change a DLCI record The message Modify DLCI record for DLCI Number appears 3 Select the DLCI record to be modified from the list of all DLCIs on the frame relay link and interface displayed Then press Enter The DLCI record entry screen displays with the fields initialized for the selected DLCI 4 Make the desired changes 5 Press Crtl a and Save your changes If a connected network DLCs type is changed from Multiplexed to Standard the following prompt will appear if the DLCI is part of a connection DLCI in Connection Update DLCI usage as follows Select one of the following choices Delete EDLCI Connections and Make a Mgmt Only PVC If you choose this selection the following actions occur All of this is typically done by frame relay service providers so there is management connectivity from the network operation control center NOC or NCC Removes this DLCI on all PVC Connections see Table 8 10 PVC Connection Options and Management PVC Connections see Table 8 12 Management PVC Options Resets any Trap Manager Destination see Table 8 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options or Default Network Destination see Table 8 11 Node IP Options that is configured for a Management PVC with this DLCI to
20. Aqua 512 1023 More than or equal to 1024 Compare this graph with the following graphs End to End Data Delivery Success to see if frames are being dropped Round Trip Network Latency to see if frame size is impacting latency 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 5 25 Using the OpenLane NMS Creating OpenLane Service Level Management SLM Reports The OpenLane SLM Reports part of Performance Wizard enables network administrators of FraameSaver SLV devices to provide securely partitioned access for their users to create and view reports via the World Wide Web that pertain only to their portion of the frame relay network These reports include a summary of overall network performance as well as detailed statistics on a per PVC basis of network latency availability and frame delivery success rate throughput for accurate service level agreement verification This measurement of throughput uses the Paradyne proprietary TruePut technology which precisely measures both within and above CIR eliminating inaccuracies due to averaging Reports are also available for physical inventory of the network s device names locations serials numbers DLCls and port speeds Network performance data is gathered from all FrameSaver SLV RMON 2 user history buckets at configurable intervals for 24 hours allowing for offline or after hours retrieval of all needed report data Also the FrameSaver SLV units can be polled in real time for onlin
21. Configuration Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem Select External Modem on Com Port to display or change the configuration options that control call processing for an external device attached to the COM port see Table 8 18 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt External Modem on Com Port i NOTE A standard EIA 232 crossover cable is required when connecting an external modem to the FrameSaver units COM Port See Serial Crossover Cable in Appendix G Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments for cable pin assignments Table 8 18 External Modem on Com Port Options 1 of 2 External Device Commands Possible Settings Disable AT Default Setting Disable Specifies the tyoe of commands to be sent over the COM port CAUTION You must not use this setting if you have an async terminal connected to the COM port Disable Commands will not be sent over the COM port AT Standard Attention AT Commands are sent over the COM port to control the external device All AT command strings will end with a carriage return hex 0x0D anda line feed hex Ox0A l Dial In Access Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether external devices can dial in to the FrameSaver unit through the COM port based on the Port Use option setting Display Conditions This option does not appear if External Device Commands is d
22. Disable Specifies whether ANSI T1 403 compliance performance report messages PRMs are generated and sent to the network over the ESF facility data link every second Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable Generates and sends PRMs Disable Does not generate and send PRMs May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 4 T1 Network Physical Options 4 of 4 Excessive Error Rate Threshold Possible Settings 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Default Setting 10E 4 Sets the error rate threshold that determines when an EER condition is declared The excessive error rate is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC6 errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF 10E 4 Declares an EER if more than 1 535 CRC6 errors are detected in a 10 second period Clears when fewer than 1 536 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 5 Declares an EER if more than 921 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 922 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 6 Declares an EER if more than 92 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 107 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 93 CRC6 errors are d
23. Nonmultiplexed DLCls Standard_out Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management between FrameSaver units and attached equipment None Does not use a routing protocol Proprietary Uses a proprietary variant of RIP version 1 to communicate routing information between FrameSaver units A FrameSaver unit must be on the other end of the link This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on multiplexed DLCls see Table 8 9 DLCI Records Options Standard_out The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing information only about other FrameSaver SLV units in the network This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on standard DLCls NOTE The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the FrameSaver unit for the management interface e g Cisco config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 ctl z WR To create this management interface Create a Standard DLCI for the data port see Configuring DLC Records for Each Interface on page 8 46 Change it to a Management PVC see Configuring Management PVCs on page 8 57 Make sure that Node IP Information has been set up see Configuring Node IP Information on page 8 11 Set Primary Link RIP to Standard_Out 8 60 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Configuring General SNMP Management 9124 A2 GH30 00 S
24. Type dvuhist f agentname DLCI_ number user_history_table_number config number_of_buckets interval download _file udh to load user defined history files for a specific DLCI Example dvuhist f Dallas51 301 3 config 30 60 Dallas301 udh The same user history table number can be used for both the link and DLCI For these examples user history table number 3 will appear as UserHistory3 on the History List See Step 5 in Monitoring a DLCI s User History Data on page 6 17 to verify that the user defined history files have been loaded Refer to installing UDH Files in Chapter 28 Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information May 1999 Preliminary 6 15 Using NetScout Manager Plus Monitoring a DLCI s History Data Once the monitoring variables have been defined a problem DLCI can monitored B gt Procedure To monitor user history data 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay radio button still selected select the Traffic radio button The appropriate icons appear 2 Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCls appear in the DLCI list box under the agent list box 3 Highlight the DLCI to be monitored 4 Click on the Custom History icon The NetScout Custom History window opens Adjust the size of the window so the entire report is shown 6 16 May 1999 Preliminary Using NetScout Manager Plus 5 Select History
25. can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow Level 1 users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 NOTE See Resetting the FrameSaver Unit in Chapter 10 Operation and Maintenance should you inadvertently be locked out 4 Save your changes See Configuring the Communication Port in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for more information about communication port configuration options 9 10 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Security and Logins Creating a Login A login ID and password is required if security is enabled You can define a combination of six login passwords Each login must be unique and have a specified access level B gt Procedure To create a login ID and password 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Control Administer Logins 2 Select New from the function keys area and press Enter 3 Enter the login ID password and security level for each login In the field Enter the Login ID ID of 1 to 10 characters Password Password from 1 to 10 characters Re enter password Password again to verify that you entered the correct password into the device Access Level Access level 1 2 or 3 Level 1 User can add change and display configuration options save and perform device testing Level 2 User can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information Level 3 User can only m
26. dropped in transit This count continues to accumulate until the maximum count value has been reached then the count is reset and starts to accumulate dropped frames again Inbound Dropped Number of bytes transmitted by the far end unit that were Characters dropped in transit This count continues to accumulate until the maximum count value has been reached then the count is reset and starts to accumulate dropped characters again May 1999 Preliminary 10 27 Operation and Maintenance Table 10 10 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics Statistic What It Indicates Avg RdTrip Latency Average round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the unit at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection Average round trip latency is measured every SLV sampling interval and the average is computed over the previous 15 sampling intervals Unknown is displayed if communication with the far end unit over the last five minutes has not been successful Max RdTrip Latency Same as average Avg RdTrip Latency but storing the maximum number of milliseconds over the sampling interval instead Unknown is displayed if communication with the far end unit over the last 15 sampling intervals has not been successful DLCI Performance Statistics These statistics appear when DLCI is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu Status Performance Statistics D
27. 00 Operation and Maintenance Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 9124 A2 GH30 00 These statistics appear when Service Level Verification SLV is selected from the Performance Statistics menu These statistics only appear for the network interface and only if DLCls are multiplexed see DLC Type option in Table 8 9 DLCI Records Options Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Service Level Verification Table 10 10 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics Statistic What It Indicates Far End DLCI Number of the multiplexed DLCI at the other end of the connection None is displayed if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated with the other end Inbound Dropped Frames Number of frames transmitted by the far end unit that were dropped in transit This count continues to accumulate until the maximum count value has been reached then the count is reset and starts to accumulate dropped frames again Dropped SLV The number of SLV inband sample packets sent that did not Responses receive a response Far End IP Addr IP Address of the unit at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection None is displayed if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated with the other end or if the unit at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI does not have an IP Address configured Inbound Dropped Frames Number of frames transmitted by the far end unit that were
28. 1 interface that were more than 8192 octets in length The device on the far end of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid DLCI Number of frames received over the interface that were addressed to DLCls outside the valid range that is a number less than 16 or greater than 1007 The device on the far end of the circuit may have been configured incorrectly or the DLCls configured for the FrameSaver unit may not match the DLCls supplied by the service provider Unknown DLCI Number of frames received over the interface that were addressed to unknown DLCls The DLCI may not have been configured or it has been configured to be Inactive Indicates that the FrameSaver units or devices at both or either end of the circuit have been configured incorrectly Unknown Error Number of frames received over the interface that do not fall into one of the other statistic categories Indicates that the error is not one that the unit can recognize May 1999 Preliminary 10 31 Operation and Maintenance Table 10 12 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 3 of 4 Statistic Frame Relay LMI LMI Protocol Status Msg Received Total LMI Errors What It Indicates LMI protocol configured for the frame relay link Normal condition Number of LMI status messages received over the interface Normal condition Number of LMI errors Reliability errors protocol errors unknown report types unknown information elements and
29. 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx CRC Errors D MIB devfrext mib E 900 secs Tag devErExtLinkAxCreErrs 0 MNS OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Total LMI Errors 900 secs 15 mins MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLink Total LMIErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary C 17 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Dynamic Frame Relay Interface Alarm Defaults These alarms apply to the NextEDGE unit s frame relay interfaces They are created during RMON initialization and will change if the interface s line speed changes Table D 3 Dynamic Frame Relay Interface Alarm Defaults Rising Falling Event Threshold Threshold MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Rx Utilization MIB MIB II RFC 1573 60 secs Rising 70 of link 65 of link Tag ifInOctets 1 min capability capability OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 l Tx Utilization MIB MIB II RFC 1573 70 of link 65 of link Tag ifOutOctets capability capability OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 16 l 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay lin
30. 1 of 2 Interface Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable i Specifies whether the DSX 1 interface selected is available for use Enable The interface is available Disable The interface is not available for use If there are time slots assigned to the DSX 1 interface when you attempt to disable it the message This action will clear all DSX 1 Cross Connections Are You Sure No appears If you select No The operation is cancelled Yes The following occurs a All existing DSX 1 interface cross connect assignments are cleared Alarms or traps associated with the DSX 1 interface are not generated LEDs associated with the DSX 1 interface are held in an off state Line Framing Format Possible Settings D4 ESF Default Setting ESF Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the DSX 1 interface D4 Uses D4 framing format ESF Uses Extended Superframe ESF framing format Line Coding Format Possible Settings AMI B8ZS Default Setting BBZS Specifies the line coding format for the DSX 1 interface AMI Uses Alternate Mark Inversion AMI line coding format B8ZS Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS line coding format 8 32 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 5 DSX 1 Physical Options 2 of 2 Line Equalization Possible Settings 0 133 133 266 266
31. 23 m Table 8 2 Service Level Verification Options on page 8 25 m Table 8 3 General System Options on page 8 26 m Table 8 5 DSX 1 Physical Options on page 8 32 Table 8 6 Data Ports Physical Options on page 8 34 Table 8 8 Frame Relay Options on page 8 42 Table 8 9 DLCI Record Options on page 8 49 m Table 8 10 PVC Connection Options on page 8 52 m Table 8 11 Node IP Options on page 8 54 Table 8 12 Management PVC Options on page 8 57 m Table 8 13 General SNMP Management Options on page 8 61 m Table 8 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options on page 8 62 m Table 8 15 SNMP NMS Security Options on page 8 65 m Table 8 16 SNMP Traps and Traps Dial Out Options on page 8 68 Table 8 17 Communication Port Options on page 8 72 m Table 8 18 External Modem on Com Port Options on page 8 76 8 2 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Setting Up the Unit When configuring the system You need to See 1 Configure the overall system Configuring System Options on page 8 22 options 2 Set up node IP information Configuring Node IP Information on page 8 54 3 Configure physical interfaces Setting Up Each Physical Interface on page 8 28 Configuring the Communication Port on page 8 72 and RIP 4 Change Auto Configuration if Setting Up Auto Configuration on page 8 10 necessary 5 Configure frame relay LMI for Configuring Frame Relay LMI for Interfaces on interfaces page
32. 26 1998 23 32 Device Name PORT 1 PHYSICAL OPTIONS Transmit Clock Internal Invert Transmit Clock Disable Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Disable Control Leads Supported Both Screen Area Function Ctrl a to access these functions Keys Area save Message Area Screen Format Description Menu Path Menu selections made to reach the current screen Device Name Customer assigned identification of the FrameSaver unit FrameSaver units model number Screen Area Selection display and input fields for monitoring and maintaining the FrameSaver unit Function Keys Area Specific functions that can be performed by pressing a specified key then pressing Return Message Area System related information and valid settings for input fields in the lower left corner System and Test Status messages in the lower right corner 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 4 5 User Interface and Basic Operation Navigating the Screens Keyboard Keys 4 6 You can navigate the screens by m Using keyboard keys Switching between the two screen work areas using function keys Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the screen area Press To Ctrl a Move cursor between the screen area and the screen function keys area Esc Return to the previous screen Right Arrow on same screen row or Move cursor to the next field Tab on any screen row Left Arrow on same screen row or Move cu
33. 8 42 6 Create DLC Records for Configuring DLC Records for Each Interface on interfaces page 8 49 7 Configure PVC connections Configuring PVC Connections on page 8 52 8 Create a management PVC Configuring Management PVCs on page 8 57 Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP on page 8 19 9 Set up access and Configuring General SNMP Management on management page 8 61 Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support on page 8 62 Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out on page 8 66 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 3 Configuration Considerations When Setting Up We recommend that you decide how to configure the FrameSaver unit before actually configuring it When setting up the FrameSaver unit you need to m Arrange for T1 service Determine where PVCs will be required in your network Refer to Chapter 3 Typical Applications for assistance Determine whether you will be using the Auto Configuration feature Refer to Setting Up Auto Configuration on page 8 10 Determine whether you want SNMP traps generated and how you would like them communicated to the management system Decide how you want to manage this unit within the context of your network and choose a management configuration Locally viaa PVC between the FrameSaver unit and a router attached to its DTE port Locally through the COM port Remotely through dedicated or multiplexed PVCs Remotely fro
34. 8 6 Main Menu Configuration Data Ports Physical Table 8 6 Data Port Physical Options 1 of 2 Transmit Clock Source Possible Settings Internal External Default Setting Internal Determines whether the DTE s transmitted data is clocked into the FrameSaver unit by its internal transmit clock or by the external clock provided by the DTE NOTE Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any physical port tests including any DTE initiated loopback tests Internal The FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing TXC DCE source for timing the incoming data External The DTE provides the clock for the transmitted data and the FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DA ITU 113 Transmit Signal Element Timing XTXC DTE source for timing the incoming data Invert Transmit Clock Possible Settings Auto Enable Disable Default Setting Auto Determines whether the clock supplied by the FrameSaver unit on interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing DCE Source TXC is phase inverted with respect to the clock used to time the incoming Transmitted Data TD Enable Phase inverts the TXC clock Use this setting when long cable lengths between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE are causing data errors Disable Does not phase invert the TXC clock Port DTE In
35. Access Type Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command to the MIB objects This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP Get and Set commands to the MIB objects However access for all read only objects is specified as read only Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Select SNMP Traps to display add or change the SNMP trap configuration options for the FrameSaver unit Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps To configure the FrameSaver unit for SNMP traps you must set The number of SNMP managers that are to receive SNMP traps from the FrameSaver unit An IP address for each SNMP manager specified The type of SNMP traps to be sent from the FrameSaver unit Use the SNMP Trap Options screen to configure the necessary configuration options needed to support the SNMP traps Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate See Table 8 16 8 66 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration See Appendix C SNMP MIBs and Trap ands RMON Alarm Defaults for
36. Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Display Conditions This option only appears when LMI Parameters is set to Custom 1 10 Specifies the number of error free messages that must be received inclusive LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 255 Default Setting 6 Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated Applies to and configured for the user side of the UNI only Display Conditions This option only appears when LMI Parameters is set to Custom and only on the network interface 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated inclusive LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 10 Configures the LMI defined T1 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies to and configured for the user side of the UNI only Display Conditions This option only appears when LMI Parameters is set to Custom and only on the network interface 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 May 1999 Preliminary 8 43 Configurat
37. Connections The PVC Connection Table screen appears 2 Select New or Modify from the PVC Connection Table screen to add or change PVC connections between a source DLCI link and destination DLCI link on a frame relay interface 3 When New is selected the configuration option field is blank Tab to the first configuration option and press the spacebar The first valid selection appears in the field NOTE Management links are not created using this screen Go to the Management PVC Entry screen Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Management PVCs 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 51 Configuration 8 52 Table 8 10 PVC Connection Options 1 of 2 Source Link Possible Settings Port 1 Net1 FR1 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface that starts a PVC connection the from end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLC or EDLCI defined that are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if Port 1 has no DLCls defined Port 1 would not appear as a valid setting Port 1 Specifies the user data port as the source link Refers to frame relay links on the user data port that are capable of having the Port Use option set to Frame Relay see Table 8 6 Data Port Physical Options Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface as the
38. Frame Relay Discovery is selected the FrameSaver unit discovers network DLCls from the network LMI status response message see the procedure on page 8 12 It configures a network DLCI required port DLCI and automatically connects them to create a PVC Automatically configured network DLCls are multiplexed and each automatically configured port DLCI carries the same DLCI Number as its corresponding network DLCI These are the same DLCI numbers that would have been available had the FrameSaver unit not been inserted in the link between your equipment and the network Frame Relay Discovery mode defaults to 1MPort management DLCls multiplexed with data DLCls on Port 1 which creates two embedded DLCls EDLCls one EDLCI for Port 1 user data and another EDLCI for management data When LMI is active on the network interface and PVC status information with provisioned DLCI numbers is next received from the network the system automatically saves the settings listed in the table on page 8 13 to the Current Configuration area NOTE Local Management PVCs e g PVCs between a router and the FrameSaver units user data port must be configured manually Auto Configuration Screen Example main auto configuration PARADYNE 9124 Device Name Node A 1 26 1998 23 32 AUTO CONF IGURATION Frame Relay Discovery Mode Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Save May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Con
39. Index 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 1x Contents x May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 About This Guide Purpose and Intended Audience This document contains information needed to properly set up configure and verify operation of the FrameSaver 9124 a T1 Frame Relay Service Level Verifier SLV unit It is intended for system designers engineers administrators and operators You must be familiar with the functional operation of digital data communications equipment and frame relay networks Document Organization Section Description Chapter 1 About the FrameSaver SLV Describes the 9124 service level verifier unit and its features Chapter 2 Management Control Describes how you establish a management link and configure end to end management control Chapter 3 Typical Applications Shows typical applications of the FrameSaver SLV unit in a frame relay network Chapter 4 User Interface and Basic Operation Shows how to navigate the user interface Chapter 5 Using the OpenLane NMS Identifies the key features of OpenLane NMS applications and describes setup and applicable windows Also includes service level management reports information Chapter 6 Using NetScout Manager Plus dentifies the key features of the NetScout Manager Plus application and the minimum hardware and software required to run the applications Also describes setup and related windows 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary
40. List from the View menu The History List window opens The newly defined user history variables should appear on this list History List serHistoryl serHistorye WeerHistorys Ok Cancel 6 Highlight the desired set of user history variables and select the OK button Data is gathered based upon the configured user history variables This may take some time so please be patient 7 Select 2D or 3D Bar from the Format menu if desired 8D Bar is shown FE pH De Pees bit Pei tat ETTET ETTET ELFIN B14 L952 236941107 1B May 1999 Preliminary 6 17 Using NetScout Manager Plus Using the 2D or 3D Bar to view the user history data collected you can click on a particular bar and get an expanded view of the data 8 Click anywhere on this window to return to the previous window view see Step 7 on page 6 17 Refer to Launching User History and Understanding Custom History Display in Chapter 28 Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information 6 18 May 1999 Preliminary Using NetScout Manager Plus Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus Once the FrameSaver SLV agent has been added to NetScout Manager Plus select either the Traffic or Protocol radio button to monitor the newly added agent or one of its DLCls NOTE Only the Traffic and Protocol radio buttons on the application selection bar are supported for FrameSaver SLV agents Th
41. May 1999 Preliminary B 3 IP Addressing Service Provider Example Total management can be performed by service providers using both private and public IP addressing A standard CSU DSU can be used by the network operation center NOC NMS This requires two dedicated DLCls Frame Relay Network No s Frame EDLCI 200 2 135 18 2 2 Relay ae eee Router DLCI 200 DLCI 909 DLC 210 Relay On Router lt S Frame Relay Physical Connection Router PVC Connection Integrated Services Center 99 16225 01 In this illustration two dedicated PVCs are required DLCI 909 is used to manage the router DLCI 910 is used to manage the unit Using private addresses ensures that the router will not pass DLCI traffic to the network so the PVC is reserved for management traffic only Notice that the DLCI for the FrameSaver unit 910 terminates in the unit and is not passed to the router The only other requirement is that there is a separate DLCI for each remote FrameSaver unit B 4 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 IP Addressing IP Addressing Scheme Examples The following examples describe some typical network scenarios they are not the only scenarios that can be used The subnet mask shown for each FrameSaver unit is 255 255 255 0 Direct PVCs to Remote FrameSaver Units In this example FrameSaver unit A is connected to The NMS at the central site Each remote Frame
42. Mixing Private and Public Addressing on the Same Network B 2 Preferred Method 0 ccc eee eee e tenes B 3 Service Provider Example 00 00 cece cece eee eee eee B 4 m IP Addressing Scheme Examples ccc cence eee eee B 5 Direct PVCs to Remote FrameSaver Units 0 0006 B 5 Routing to Remote FrameSaver Units on the Same Subnet Routing to Remote FrameSaver Units Using Different Subnets B 7 Routing to Remote FrameSaver Units Using Routers B 8 Assigning IP Addresses and Subnet Masks 005 C SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults E MIB SUpDOR nse uacs ane see ects en boot a cece beeen cece cece sou C 2 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps 000 cee eee eee eee C 2 Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps 0 000 eee eens C 3 Irap warmStart enccnds4 cece ne etaoe deca E EEEE EEUE C 3 Trap authenticationFailure ananuna cee C 4 Traps linkKUp and linkKDown 0 c cece eee C 4 Traps enterprise Specific 2 0 eee eens C 7 Variable Bindings enterpriseTestStart Stop 00005 C 11 Traps RMON SpCCIIC sc cedscendsiesdtbaccstecustadesiacsics C 13 Variable Bindings risingAlarm and fallingAlarm C 13 RMON Alarm and Event Defaults 00 00 ccc cece eee eee Event Defaults 2 0 0 0 ccc eee n eens C 14 Rising Event Operation 0 0 c ccc eens C 15 Physical
43. NetScout Manager Plus main window to appear make sure your environment is set up exactly as specified in your NetScout Readme file You will need to m Copy the OpenLane Performance Wizard directory to a user directory Add frame relay agents to the NetScout Manager Configure agent properties Verify and correct domains and groups Monitor the agent and DLCls Before You Get Started Before getting started you need to copy some OpenLane Performance Wizard directories to a NetScout Manager Plus user directory Performance Wizard provides these directories as a starting point for loading new alarms and creating history files A template of alarms and values for configuring alarms and several templates for creating history files specific to the FrameSaver unit are available The Performance Wizard paradyne directories include the following Properties paradyne fsd file found in PerfWiz netscout alarms directory Properties paradyne fst file found in PerfWiz netscout alarms directory Alarms slvtemplate fct file found in PerfWiz netscout alarms directory User history pd udh files found in PerfWiz netscout userHistory directory These files should be moved to SNSHOME usr So they can be used See Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template on page 6 8 and Creating History Files on page 6 13 for additional information May 1999 Preliminary 6 3 Using NetScout Manager Plus Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetSc
44. Number of Trap Managers configuration option Default Uses the default network COM Uses the COM port This selection is only available when Communication Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 8 17 Communication Port Options PVCname Uses the defined management inkname the name given the Management PVC This selection only appears when at least one Management PVC is defined for the node May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 2 of 4 General Traps Possible Settings Disable Warm AuthFail Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP trap messages for warmStart and or authenticationFailure events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Disable Does not send trap messages for these events Warm Sends trap messages for warmStart events only AuthFail Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events only Both Sends trap messages for both warmStart and authenticationFailure events Enterprise Specific Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events Disable Does not send trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events Link Traps Possible Settings Disable U
45. Performance Statistics on page 10 33 When you want to observe and estimate the frequency or duration of a specific condition e g gathering information for reporting a problem to the network determine whether a statistic is incrementing B gt Procedure To determine whether a statistic is incrementing 1 Record the accumulated value for the statistic of interest the beginning value 2 Press r for Refresh to see if it changes 3 Ifthe statistic is incrementing record the ending value and the amount of time between the beginning and ending values Continue to Refresh the screen until you have a sense of how serious the problem might be If you have a Level 1 security access level you can reset the performance statistics locally using an asynchronous terminal see Clearing Performance Statistics on page 10 26 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 10 25 Operation and Maintenance Clearing Performance Statistics Performance statistics counters can also be reset to the baseline when using a directly connected asynchronous terminal and your security Access Level is Level 1 This feature is useful when troubleshooting problems Statistic counters are not actually cleared using this feature True statistic counts are always maintained so SLAs can be verified and they can be viewed from an SNMP NMS However since statistics can be cleared locally the statistics viewed on the asynchronous terminal may be different from t
46. SLV products m nstallation and Setup of Network Health and reports on page 7 2 Viewing Network Health Charts and Tables on page 7 3 Reports Applicable to SLV Units on page 7 9 For additional information about installing accessing and managing the FrameSaver SLV unit through Concord s Network Health and for information about applicable reports refer to Network Health Installation Guide to help you install the application Network Health User Guide to help you get started using the application Network Health Reports Guide to help you understand and use Frame Relay reports Network Health Traffic Accountant Reports Guide to help you understand and use Traffic Accountant reports 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 7 1 Concord s Network Health Installation and Setup of Network Health Refer to the Network Health Installation Guide for installation instructions and follow the instructions applicable to your network platform Each Network Health application provides a different set of functions called a module Each module used requires a separate license to gain access to those features and functions Make sure that you license the Poller application so you can poll SLV units and collect data Before starting the installation Verify the amount of disk and swap space required for your network Make sure that your operating system is appropriately configured m Have user account informatio
47. SLV units to your network B gt Procedure To add an SLV unit from HP OpenView or NetView 1 Use the HP OpenView or NetView autodiscovery feature to create submaps and discover an SLV unit 2 Click on the submap containing the SLV unit then click on the icon for the unit 3 Use the following HP OpenView menu selection sequence to access Performance Wizard Device Explorer Windows Control Performance Wizard Device Explorer Unix Performance Performance Wizard Device Explorer The OpenLane Performance Wizard Device Explorer window opens so you can change or verify the Community Name and view the graphs Refer to your DCE Manager User s Guide for additional information B gt Procedure To add an SLV unit from Performance Wizard Device Explorer 1 Select New Device from the File menu The New Device dialog box opens New Device Device Name l Community public Cancel Apply Help 2 Enter the unit s IP address or IP hostname in the Device Name field 3 Change the Community Name if necessary 4 Select the OK button The New Device dialog box closes and the unit s IP address or IP hostname appears in the Device Explorer device display area Refer to Populating the Device Display Area in Chapter 2 Using the Device Explorer of the OoenLane Performance Wizard User s Guide for additional information 5 4 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Using the OpenLa
48. Trap Variable Trap variable to be configured The iflndex for the frame relay logical interface is 1 Key2 DLCI number same as DLCI above Absolute or Delta radio button 1 Rising Falling or Both radio button 2 Threshold Value that will trigger a trap 1 Latency MIB variables should be Absolute all others should be Delta 2 Generally Rising is selected 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add this alarm 6 Repeat Steps 3 through 5 until all traps are configured for all DLCls Refer to Chapter 8 Configuring Alarms of the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information 6 12 May 1999 Preliminary Using NetScout Manager Plus Creating History Files Up to 14 additional user history tables can be created in the FrameSaver unit for each interface An interface is a specific DLCI or the entire frame relay interface A table must be created for each DLCI or frame relay link to be monitored Additional user history tables are created using the command line prompt in NetScout Manager Plus to load a file that contains the OIDs Object IDs to be monitored into the unit Paradyne provides several useful examples including three files containing a complete set of OIDs appropriate to the interface to be monitored one for a DLCI one for a frame relay link and one containing system type OIDs Any of these files can be used as a template when creating customized histo
49. and assigned to each DLCI When configuring alarms manually every alarm must be configured for each DLCI that is if there are eight alarms and 20 DLCls 160 trap configurations must be created 8 x 20 For this reason it is recommended that the Paradyne defaults be used Follow the procedure below to configure alarms manually To load Paradyne default settings for alarms follow the procedure on page 6 8 B gt Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window see the window on page 6 5 Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area in the upper right of the window then Property down the center of the screen The Custom Property Editor window opens see the window on page 6 9 Select a DLCI from the Trap list and select the Add button to the right of the list The Add Trap window opens cet Wels Tajai prm a Glair trapne Foe Eames i WE Tm T kali Beta Aisig allie E i Thermite Tery m Daaeripdien i aama pati May 1999 Preliminary 6 11 Using NetScout Manager Plus 4 Click on the button to the right of indicated fields for a drop down list from which selections can be made Minimally configure the following fields Domain User Defined DLC DLCI number for trap being assigned Stats Type PARADYNE
50. be configured Must be configured Must be configured Must be configured Falling Threshold Default 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number C 20 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Dynamic DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area These alarms apply to DLCls on the network interface They are created either during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created and put into the NetScout defined alarm area They will be reconfigured if the interface s line speed changes Table D 6 Dynamic DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area Rising Falling Threshold Threshold MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Default Default Rx DLCI Link MIB FT DTE MIB RFC 2115 70 of link 65 of link Utilization Tag trCircuitReceivedOctets capability capability OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Tx DLCI Link MIB FT DTE MIB RFC 2115 Rising 70 of link 65 of link Utilization Tag frCircuitSentOctets capability capability OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for t
51. below B gt Procedure To save the configuration options changes 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen s function keys area 2 Type s to select the Save function and press Enter The Save Configuration To screen appears NOTE If you try to exit the Configuration menu without saving changes a Save Configuration screen appears requiring a Yes or No response lf you select No the Main Menu screen reappears and the changes are not saved If you select Yes the Save Configuration To screen appears 3 Select the configuration option area where you want to save the changes to usually Current Configuration and press Return When Save is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen NOTE There are other methods of changing configurations like SNMP and auto configuration Since multiple sessions can be active at the same time the last change made overwrites any previous or current changes being made For instance Saving your configuration changes would cause configuration changes made via another method to be lost If you are making changes and someone else makes changes and saves them your changes would be lost 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 9 Configuration Setting Up Auto Configuration 8 10 The auto configuration feature allows you to select a method of automatic configuration and connection of DLCls within the FrameSaver unit When
52. burst range parameters 1 From Device Explorer select a device s DLCI so it is highlighted 2 Select Configure Device from the Edit menu The Configure Device dialog box opens to the Frame Ranges tab with the Burst Ranges tab in the background Configure Device File Help Device 135 90 153 3 Interface Frame Relay on Network Port Sublnterface OLEI 100 Frame Ranges Burst Ranges a Apply edi Set Frame Size Range Upper Limit Qctets 127 Cancel Help Frame Size Range Upper Limit Octets 1023 SSE6855 3 Select the Burst Ranges tab to bring it to the forefront if you want to set Burst Range Upper Limits The procedure for setting the frame size and burst upper limits is the same 5 8 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Using the OpenLane NMS 4 Select a row in the box below the Frame Size Range Upper Limit Octets or Burst Range Upper Limit Octets heading so it is highlighted and the selected value appears in the Edit box NOTE If you change frame size ranges the frame size distribution cannot be displayed by the NetScout Manager Performance Wizard is recommended for display 5 Change the Upper Limit value and select the Apply button If you change the upper limit the numbers under the Frame Size Range Upper Limit Octets heading are re sorted going from lowest to the highest When editing Upper Limits you cannot Enter letters or characters only numbers are pe
53. configuration with many DLCls from a unit s Customer Configuration 1 or 2 option area into its Current Configuration area may take time Allow a minute or more for the downloaded file to be put into the unit s currently active configuration 10 36 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance B gt Procedure To initiate an FTP session 1 Start the FTP client program on your host For example on a Unix host type ftp followed by the FrameSaver unit s IP address 2 Ifa login and password are required see Creating a Login in Chapter 9 Security and Logins you are prompted to enter them If not press Enter The FTP prompt appears The starting directory is the root directory Use standard FTP commands during the FTP session as well as the following remote FTP commands Command Definition cd directory Change the current directory on the FrameSaver unit node to the specified directory dir directory Print a listing of the directory contents in the specified directory If no directory is specified the current one is used get file file2 Copy a file from the remote directory of the FrameSaver unit node to the local directory on the host for configuration files only remotehelp Print the meaning of the command If no argument is given a command list of all Known commands is printed ls directory Print an abbreviated list of the specified directory s contents If no directory is spec
54. created The DLCI number entered must be unique for the interface Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any active frame relay tests 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number inclusive DLCI Type Possible Settings Standard Multiplexed Default Setting Standard Specifies whether the DLCI is standard or multiplexed This field is read only when the selected DLCI is used in a PVC or Management link connection and the DLCI Type is J Standard Display Conditions This option does not appear for a user data port l Standard Supports standard DLCls as specified by the Frame Relay Standards Use this setting when a non FrameSaver unit is at the other end Multiplexed Enables multiplexing of multiple connections into a single DLCI Allows a single PVC through the frame relay network to carry multiple DLCls as long as these connections are between the same two endpoints proprietary Do not select Multiplexed unless there are FrameSaver units at both ends of the connection CIR bps Possible Settings 0 maximum line rate on port Default Setting 64000 Determines the data rate for the DLCI that the network commits to accept and carry without discarding frames the CIR in bits per second Entry of an invalid rate causes the error message Value Out of Range 0 x where x the maximum line rate available on the port Committed Burst Size Bc Bits Possibl
55. eed Farm 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 5 13 Using the OpenLane NMS Correlate the time at which a problem occurred to the following graphs Throughput Shows the actual volume of data in frames per second for both incoming and outgoing data over a physical link The line speed is also shown so you can easily see when the link s physical capacity is about to be exceeded Errored Frames Shows acount of errored or discarded frames over a physical link for both incoming and outgoing data LMI Signaling Errors Only displayed if the Frame Relay on Data Port 1 interface was selected This is an errors per second count for each type of error detected Reliability Errors Protocol Errors and Channel Inactives Unknown Protocol Frames shows the number of unknown protocol errors received on the link lf Frame Relay for Data Port 1 was selected compare LMI Signaling Protocol Errors against the Unknown Protocol Frames graph to see how many of the LMI errors were due to wrong protocol being used See Frame Relay Performance Statistics in Chapter 11 Displaying System Information for additional information May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Using the OpenLane NMS DS1 Physical Link Integrity T1 Only Use this grouping of graphs to compare actual throughput with T1 errors With this window you can determine the amount of time the link has been operating error free and what types of e
56. event defaults Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments dentifies cables used with the access unit and provides pin assignments for them along with those of the connectors interfaces Technical Specifications Equipment List Lists key terms acronyms concepts and sections A master glossary of terms and acronyms used in Paradyne documents is available on the World Wide Web at www paradyne com Select Library gt Technical Manuals Technical Glossary xii May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Conventions Used Convention Used Italic Menu sequence Path Brackets Text highlighted in red About This Guide When Used To indicate variable information e g DLCI nnnn or model specific information e g 9124 only To provide an abbreviated method for indicating the selections to be made from a menu or selections from within a menu before performing a procedural step For example Main Menu Status System and Test Status indicates that you should select Status from the Main Menu then select System and Test Status To provide a check point that coincides with the menu path shown at the top of the screen Always shown within parentheses so you can verify that you are referencing the correct table e g Path main config alarm To indicate multiple selection choices when more than one selection is available e g Performance Statistics Status gt Network Port 1 To indicat
57. for accessing remote site units that are not co located with the NMS In the configuration below the FrameSaver units management data is multiplexed with customer data onto a single PVC sharing the same PVC source DLCI 20 to destination DLCI 60 There is one configured PVC through the network a shared PVC for management and customer data Management and Customer Data FramerSaver Unit B FrameSaver DLCI 20 DLCI 60 Frame Relay Network Customer i Data Frame Frame B Relay Relay ance Physical Connection Roudier PVC Connection Using Shared PVC 98 15863 If using this method to access remote sites map or subinterface statements must be added to the router at the central site to ensure that management traffic destined for the remote site units is routed to the FrameSaver unit at the central site by the router Once traffic gets to the central site FrameSaver unit it is rerouted to the appropriate remote site FrameSaver units If desired higher priority may be given to DLCls carrying customer data When configuring an embedded DLCI EDLCI for management data the DE discard eligible bit may be set When there is traffic congestion the network first discards the management data since they are already marked discard eligible 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 2 7 Management Control Management Control Using a Dedicated DLCI Management control through
58. is provided in two graph views of Port Speed Capacity Shows capacity calculated based upon the FrameSaver unit s data rate of CIR Capacity Shows capacity calculated based upon the FrameSaver unit s CIR Compare how CIR and Line Speed on the graphs compare to the CIR and Line Speed that had been configured seen near the top of the window The percentages calculated are based upon those values When zero CIR has been configured the speed of the link s capacity is used in the calculations instead of the speed of the DLCI s allocated capacity These graphs are used primarily for capacity planning or in CIR negotiations Throughput Shows the actual volume of data in kilobits per second for both incoming and outgoing data over a frame relay PVC Throughput only appears when the port is connected to the frame relay network CIR is also shown so you can easily see when CIR is being exceeded When the DLCI is exceeding CIR trying to deliver more data than was contracted for check the Round Trip Network Latency and End to End Data Delivery graphs on the PVC Data Delivery Analysis window to verify that the DLCI is the cause of apparent network problems Congestion Helps determine the degree of traffic congestion on the network and the reason some frames may have been discarded by the network The number of BECNs counted over time are shown The network sends BECNSs as a warning that outbound frames
59. it See Performing a Software Upgrade in Chapter 12 Operation and Maintenance Wait until message clears No action needed Contact service provider if test initiated by the network Wait until the test ends and message clears Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path main test Stop the test from the same screen the test was started from Wait and try again Contact one of the IP address user and request that they logoff 9124 A2 GH30 00 Table 10 4 Device Messages 6 of 6 Message What It Indicates What To Do User Interface Idle Value Out of Range Status Information Previously active session is now closed ended and access via the COM port or modem port is now available Previously active session is now closed ended and access via the COM port is now available Session has been ended due to timeout CIR entered for the DLCI is a number greater than the maximum allowed Excess Burst Size entered for the DLCI is a number greater than the maximum allowed DLCI Number entered is less than 16 or greater than 1007 Operation and Maintenance Log onto the FrameSaver unit No action needed Enter a valid CIR 0 1536000 Enter a valid Excess Burst Size 0 1536000 Enter a valid number 16 1007 Status information is useful when monitoring the FrameSaver unit Use the Status menu to display information concerning m System and Test Status Messages
60. label for the Registration Number Refer to the equipment s label for the Certification Number Refer to the equipment s label for safety information 32 F to 122 F 0 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 5 to 85 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling 2 9 inches 7 4 cm 8 5 inches 21 6 cm 12 5 inches 31 8 cm 2 59 Ibs 1 18 kg 7 9 watts 60 Hz 3 0 135 A at 120 Vac 123 Result 27 Btu per hour May 1999 Preliminary E 1 Technical Specifications Table E 1 Specification COM Port Standard Data rates T1 Network Interface Data rates Services supported Physical interface USA Physical interface Canada Framing format Coding format Line Build Out LBO ANSI PRM Bit stuffing DSX 1 Interface if applicable Physical interface Framing format Coding format DTE line equalization Send AIS Data Port Standard Data rates May 1999 Preliminary 1 Slot FrameSaver Unit Technical Specifications 2 of 2 Criteria 25 position DB25 connector EIA 232 ITU V 24 ISO 2110 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 and 115 2 kbps 8 position modular unkeyed USOC RJ48C jack Up to 1 536 Mbps Fractional T1 service frame relay service RJ48C CA81A using adapter cable D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB Selectable AT amp T TR 62411 8 position modular connector with optional 8 position modular to DB15 adapter D
61. login is required for the session the effective access level is also determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option This option does not affect the TS Management Link NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the session or the user For example if the assigned Session Access Level is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only level 3 access is allowed for the session Level 1 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with J the capability to view system information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed Level 2 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information only they cannot change configuration options or run tests Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a Telnet session is disconnected after a specified period of keyboard inactivity NOTE Changing this setting does not affect the current session it changes all subsequent sessions Enable Terminates the session after the Disc
62. may encounter congestion and may be dropped When looking at these graphs the of Port Speed Capacity of CIR Capacity and Throughput line graph patterns should be essentially the same The only difference should be the scale values along the left side of each graph based upon the measurement being shown 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 5 21 Using the OpenLane NMS PVC Data Delivery Analysis For a more complete view of network traffic this graph summary brings together the information needed to determine the cause of frame relay lost packets and or excessive network latency A patent is pending on this graphical report Network service providers can use this screen to help determine whether their network or the customer s data was the cause for a missed service level agreement SLA Be PAT a te d ME EE ee ee Ei N E ge agg yee a You can view the Transmit Burst Analysis As CIR and End to End Data Delivery Success graphs in either Bits or Frames by changing the radio button selection In this example the Frames radio button was selected f Bits is selected the Transmit Burst Analysis As CIR graph is measured in Total Mbps Tx and the End to End Data Delivery Success graph is measured in Total Kops Tx m If Frames is selected both the Transmit Burst Analysis As CIR and End to End Data Delivery Success graphs are measured in Total Frames Tx 5 22 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 912
63. node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node subnet mask with zeros When the node s subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 11 Node IP Options 2 of 3 Default IP Destination Possible Settings None COM PVCname Default Setting None Specifies where a default IP destination or route is connected so that data without a specifically defined PVC will have a route Examples If the default IP network is connected to the communications port you would select COM If the default IP network is connected to a far end device over the management PVC named Tpa as defined by the Name configuration option see Table 8 12 Management PVCs Options you would select the PVC name Tpa NOTE Ifthe link to the IP destination selected as the default route becomes disabled or down the unrouteable data will be discarded Make sure that the link selected is operational and if that link goes down change the default destination CAUTION Use care when configuring a default route to an interface that has a subnet route configured at a remote end where the NMS router LAN adapter terminal server etc is connected Communicating with an unknown IP address on the subnet will cause tempor
64. not appear as a valid setting Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface as the destination link Clear Clears the Destination Link and Destination DLCI settings and suppresses Destination EDLCI May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 10 PVC Connection Options 2 of 2 Destination DLCI i Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the destination DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLC must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTE Destination DLCI has no value if Destination Link contains no value l 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number Destination EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame J relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option only appears if Source DLCI contains a multiplexed J DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number Setting Up Management and Communication Options Select Management and Communication to display the Management and Communications Options menu The following Management and Communication Options can be selected from the menu Node IP O
65. not require the speed of T1 and FrameSaver 9624 units can be used In addition not all remote sites need to have the same frame relay FrameSaver unit They can have All FrameSaver 9624 units at the remote sites m FrameSaver 9124 units providing voice service e g SDN Megacom etc at some remote sites and FrameSaver 9624s at others m FrameSaver 9124 or 9624 units at remote sites where RMON is desired or needed and FrameSaver 9120s at other remote sites However using non SLv units like 9120s instead of SLV units eliminates any benefits that are gained by using a FrameSaver 9124 or 9624 NOTE The additional capabilities provided by FrameSaver SLV units include Intelligent latency and delivery verification TruePut data delivery RMON data collection and SLV reporting Configurable alarm thresholds and custom history buckets Interoperability with NetScout applications As a result mixing SLV and non SLvV units is not recommended even though FrameSaver SLV units support non SLV FrameSaver units 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 3 7 Typical Applications Using All 9624 FrameSaver Units at Remote Sites One of the most common and practical applications for frame relay FrameSaver units is to use a FrameSaver 9124 unit at the central site and FrameSaver 9624 units at most remote sites The example below shows this application At the central site the FrameSaver 9124 with increased m
66. on user data ports discover the LMI protocol from an attached device via LMI status polls Frame relay links on the Network interface discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and listening for correct poll response messages Standard Supports Standard LMI and the Stratacom enhancements to the Standard LMI Annex A Supports LMI as specified by Q 933 Annex A Annex D Supports LMI as specified by ANSI T1 617 Annex D 8 42 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 8 Frame Relay and LMI Options 2 of 4 LMI Parameters Possible Settings System Custom Default Setting System Allows you to use the system LMI options or to set specific LMI options for this interface System Use system LMI options see Table 8 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Custom Use the following options in this table to configure LMI parameters LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the LMI defined N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before reporting an error Display Conditions This option only appears when LMI Parameters is set to Custom 1 10 Specifies the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link inclusive LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 1
67. original settings String RMON database reset to defaults enterpriseSecondary devLastTrapString Operating software has detected ClockFail 4 devHealthAndStatus that the secondary clock source mib has failed String Secondary clock failed enterpriseSecondary Operating software has detected ClockFailClear 104 that the secondary clock source is operational again String Secondary clock restored May 1999 Preliminary C 9 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table C 6 enterprise Specific Variable Bindings 3 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterpriseSelfTest Fail 2 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib enterpriseTest For physical interfaces and Start 5 frame relay links m iflndex RFC 1573 m 0 0 placeholder devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib For virtual circuits DLCls devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib m devFrExtDiciDici devFrExt mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib enterprise Test Stop 105 May 1999 Preliminary Unit has completed re initialization and a hardware failure was detected String Selftest failed s s is the contents of devSelfTestResult At least one test has been started on an interface or virtual circuit String testString test started on ifString E g DTE Ex
68. region department or business process Executive IT Manager and Customer Service Level reports are provided Using these reports you can measure service performance against goals and agreements Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled About the At a Glance Reports At a Glance Reports consolidate various important DLCI and network performance indicators onto a single page Up to ten DLCls can be included in an At a Glance Report Using the report on page 7 18 you can compare a DLCI s volume with the network s performance over a specified period of time Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled Using the report on page 7 19 all the enhanced network statistics that only an SLV unit can accurately collect is provided so you can truly monitor the health of the frame relay network and see the effects of the customer s utilization on network efficiency About Trend Reports Printed Reports 7 8 By specifying specific variables like bandwidth trend analysis can be performed and shown on Trend Reports Up to ten variables for a DLCI or ten DLCls on one variable can be generated on a single trend report Information can be presented in a l
69. router failure Not recommended for NSPs Port 1_ Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Port 1 goes down or LMI down on Port 1 when LMI on the network interface goes down and allows LMI to come back up when LMI comes back on both interfaces That is the LMI state for one interface is dependent on the other Use this setting when backup will be performed by the router It is not recommended since it makes fault isolation more difficult LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before reporting an error Applies to both the user and network sides of the UNI 1 10 Specifies the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link inclusive 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 23 Configuration 8 24 Table 8 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 2 of 2 LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 1 Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to both the user and network sides of the UNI 1 10 Specifies the number of error free messages that must be received inclusive LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 255 Default Setting 6
70. sequence errors are included in this total Network problems Number of Inactives Number of times the LMI has declared the frame relay link Inactive Network problems Frame Relay HDLC Errors Rx Total Errors Rx Total Discards Rx Overruns Rx DTR Lost Events Rx Non Octet Frames Rx CRC Errors Number of receiver errors on the interface The following are included in this count Receive invalid frames short frames long frames invalid DLCIs unknown DLCls and unknown errors Rx Total Discards Receive errors non octet aligned frames frames with CRC errors and Rx Overruns Number of receiver discards on the interface The following are included in this count Resource errors Rx Overruns Frames received when the link was down Inactive and disconnected DLCls Inactive destination DLCls Unknown EDLCls Number of receiver overruns too many bits on the interface Number of times DTR has been lost lowered on the T1 or ISDN interface Number of non octet frames received on the interface Number of received CRC cycle redundancy check errors 1 Does not appear when Port Type is set to X 21 see Port Type option in Table 9 6 Data Ports Physical Options 10 32 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 10 12 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 4 of 4 Statistic What Tt Indicates It Indicates Tx Total Errors Total number of transmit errors on the i
71. supplied by the service provider edit the Frame Relay configuration options see Table 8 8 Main Menu gt Configuration Network Data Ports Frame Relay Table 8 8 Frame Relay and LMI Options 1 of 4 LMI Protocol Possible Settings Initialize_From_Net1FR1 Initialize From_Interface Auto _On_LMI Fail Standard Annex A Annex D Default Setting For data port links Initialize _From_Net1iFR1 For network links Auto_On_LMI Fail Specifies either the LMI protocol supported on the frame relay interface or the discovery source for the LMI protocol Initialize_From_Net1FR1 The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol initially discovered on the primary Network frame relay link Net1FR1 LMI Protocol is set to None internally but once a protocol has become active or is set on the primary Network link the protocol will be set to the same value on this link Standard Annex A or Annex D The protocol will not be updated based on changes to NetiFR1 after being set initially Initialize_From_Interface The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or DTE device Once a protocol has become active the protocol will be set to the protocol discovered Standard Annex A or Annex D on the frame relay link The protocol will not be updated after being initially discovered Frame relay links
72. taken from the Node Subnet Mask Primary Link is set to Net1 FR1 Primary DLCI is automatically created from the network DLCI Primary EDLCI is set to 2 management data Set DE is set to Enable RIP is set to Proprietary For PVC Connection PVC Connections information see Table 8 1 0 Source Link set to Port 1 P ORRI KADENA Source DLCI Port 1 DLCI is automatically created Source EDLCI is left blank Primary Destination Link is set to Net1 FR1 Primary Destination DLCI is the automatically created network DLCI Primary Destination EDLCI is set to 0 2 If the same DLCI EDLCI combination already exists no changes are made to the existing management PVC You may want to configure a unique Node IP Address and Subnet Mask and create a management PVC for this address and subnet mask prior to Frame Relay Discovery 8 14 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Automatic Configuration for Selected Frame Relay Discovery Mode 3 of 4 If the mode selected is Then setup configuration is No Managemert DLCI Records 1Port Network DLCI Number is automatically created from the LMI status response message Port 1 DLCI Number is automatically created For DLCI Record information from the network DLCI see Table 8 9 DLCI Records Example Options Network DLC 1001 gt Port 1 DLCI 1001 Network DLCI Type is set to Multiplexed
73. the OpenLane DCE Manager for Unix or Windows software and open the application as specified in the applicable User s Guide m Use the Autodiscovery feature to discover the new FrameSaver SLV units Refer to the appropriate User s Guide for installation and setup and information about accessing and managing the FrameSaver SLV unit through OpenLane DCE Manager OpenLane DCE Manager User s Guide OpenLane DCE Manager for HP OpenView for Windows User s Guide Installation and Setup of Performance Wizard Performance Wizard can be used alone or it can be invoked from an HP OpenView or NetView window To use this application Install the OpenLane Performance Wizard software and open the application m Add frame relay agents to the Device Explorer unless using DCE Manager Set up historical data collection 5 2 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Using the OpenLane NMS Installing and Starting OpenLane Performance Wizard Installation instructions are located in the OpenLane Performance Wizard User s Guide Open the application by following the instructions contained in Getting Started with the Performance Wizard Depending upon your platform see one of the following procedures m Installing on Solaris HP UX and AIX Installing on Windows NT or Windows 95 The OpenLane Performance Wizard Device Explorer window opens This window has three columns of information End Point Shows the devices in the netwo
74. the async user interface or an interface or an SNMP SNMP Manager from Manager after 60 seconds devLastTrapString has elapsed without devHealthAndStatus mib another change enterpriseDevice An internal device failure Operating software has detected Fail 3 The vaiiable binding tor this an internal device failure trap is devHealthandStatus enterpriseDLCI The DLCI for an interface DLCI is down Down 11 supporting one side of the UNI is down enterpriseDLCIUp 12 The DLCI for an interface DLCI is up again supporting one side of the UNI is up enterprisePrimary A failure of the device s Operating software has detected ClockFail 1 currently configured that the primary clock source has primary clock source failed enterprisePrimary The failure of the device s Operating software has detected ClockFailClear 101 currently configured that the primary clock source is primary clock source has now operational again cleared enterpriseRMON All RMON related option Default Factory Configuration Reset ToDefault 13 changes have been reset to settings have been reloaded their default values returning RMON related options to their original settings enterpriseSecondary A failure of the device s Operating software has detected ClockFail 4 currently configured that the secondary clock source secondary clock source has failed enterpriseSecondary _ The failure of the device s Operating software has detected Cloc
75. this manual m Within the U S A call 1 800 PARADYNE 1 800 727 2396 Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 8623 XIV May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 About the FrameSaver SLV Overview 9124 A2 GH30 00 The FrameSaver SLV Service Level Verifier system consists of This system provides increased manageability monitoring and diagnostics so customers can identify problems more efficiently troubleshoot those problems FrameSaver SLV 9124 units OpenLane NMS applications for Unix or Windows DCE Manager and or Performance Wizard with Diagnostic Wizard and Service Level Management Reports NetScout Manager Plus application Standalone NetScout Probes if needed faster and maximize their network to control costs May 1999 Preliminary 1 1 About the FrameSaver SLV It provides everything needed to effectively and economically monitor network service levels Ability to track protocols being used in the network and display their bandwidth consumption rates with the ability to adjust the frame relay network so traffic will run smoothly m Ability to track network usage down to the node level so users generating excessive traffic can be identified Ability to determine when traffic will be the heaviest so bandwidth can be adjusted for greater network efficiency during high traffic periods m Ability to monitor traffic at multiple levels so capacity requirements and major network changes can b
76. 0 c ccc cece ence eee TOS TIMCOM accu een wie ees coat oan see ee een et eee a ee ee tiie 11 13 Changing the Test Timeout from OpenLane Diagnostic Wizard 11 14 m Starting and Stopping a Test 0000 c cece eee eee eee Abonma Al VOSS sesreererar ces oa bare aces RAEES Determining Test Status and Results cece eee eee ee PVC Tests xeaa asonacnnekvayede ave nase ue aseann seats eben pennges PVC Loopback 0 c cece cence cece eee e sent ee eeenees Send Palen 2759024 nanqegaceines ITPA ERPE NENET ATE MOMMOMPANCINss5v20te canuws nae ee RAEES EERTE SEEE ee 11 18 Connectivity 2 eee tee een teens 11 18 m Physical Tests 0 0 ccc ec eee cece cece eet eeeeeenteneeneney Line Loopback 22404ch cess 2455 4ode becuebecus ceqeecaewacsat Payload Loopback ccc cece cece cece cece eee eeeeeueees Repeater Loopback soc 02 secs desea nannan nannaa 11 21 Send Line Loopback cece eee eee Send and Monitor Pattern Tests 0c cece cece eee e ees DIE Loopback 2 on sencevenadacnencancaboancsunncabearieensie IP PINO TOSI dana ie ae a a ae ede aake ee ae aoe Rae abe dean E we ave eet areas 11 25 LAM 1CSl ona pees poe ee hee Me Ade ee AE ee Helse A ee EEN 11 27 LMI Packet Utility 2 00 00 00000 c cece eee eee eens A Menu Hierarchy 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary vii Contents B IP Addressing m Selecting an IP Addressing Scheme 000 ccc eee eens B 1
77. 000 cence 7 4 Grouping Elements for Reports 00 ce cece eee eee 7 5 Generating Reports for a Group 0 cee eee 7 6 Viewing Network Health Charts and Tables 00 000 eee 7 7 About Service Level Reports 0 0 0 0 c cece eee eee 7 8 About the At a Glance Reports 0 0 cece eee eee 7 8 About Trend Reports 0 0 0 cece eee n eee 7 8 Printed ReDo 25454 daguyace oe coeepaoseeessee NEDRE EA ace 7 8 m Reports Applicable to SLV Units 0 0 ccc eee 7 9 Exceptions Reports cand icant dawe phat Ried boa dees ee 7 9 Network Summary Report 0 0 cece eee ee eee ease Leaders Summary Report 0 cece eee ens 7 11 Elements Summary Report 000 cc cece cece eee e eee eees Supplemental Report J asinde cing ectans he edaashegeesageneaw meee 7 13 Executive Service Level Report 00 cee eee e eee IT Manager Service Level Report 0 0 0cceseeeee cues Customer Service Level Report 0 ccc cece ence eae At a Glance Reports 0 00cc cece eee cece eee eeeenees Trend Reports 0 c cece cece ene cence eee ene ence eens iv May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Contents 8 Configuration m Setting Up the Unit seciw d aws wadeope eaedh Shura sheds aed s eee ede ae Considerations When Setting Up 0 0 0 cece eee eee Selecting a Management Interface 0 0 cece eee eee Minimal Configuration B
78. 1 Create a DLCI for the data port Main Menu gt Configuration Data Ports DLC Records 2 Select Management PVC Configuration Management and Communication Management PVC 3 Make the DLCI Record a management DLCI to create a Management PVC Minimally enter the following options for each of the DLCI Records created Name for the management DLCI Special and the IP Address for the interface if it is different from the Node IP Address Primary Link for this DLCI i e the DLCI s primary destination interface Primary DLCI i e the DLCI number at the other end of the PVC 4 Save your changes 8 18 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP Using the FrameSaver unit s standard routing Information protocol RIP feature a management interface is created so management data can pass between FrameSaver SLV units B gt Procedure 1 Configure the port s router to receive RIP For example if using a Cisco router configure config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 then ctl z WR 2 Create a Standard DLCI for the data port see Configuring DLC Records for Each Inrterface on page 8 46 Main Menu Configuration Data Ports Port n DLCI Records 3 Change it to a Management PVC see Configuring Management PVCs on page 8 5 7 4 Make sure that Node IP Information has been set up see Configuring Node
79. 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Control Modem Call Directories 2 Press the spacebar until the desired Directory Number appears A or 1 5 Set up the A Alarm directory as the primary directory You can also set up an alternate directory Press Return and the cursor is moved to the Directory Phone Number field 3 Enter the phone number for the remote unit that this system will dial Use valid characters only Enter For ASCII text Entering the phone number Space Readability characters underscore _ and dash Comma Readability character for a 2 second pause B Blind dialing P Pulse dialing l W sO Wait for dial tone 4 Save your entries See Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out on page 8 66 for trap and alarm information See Configuring SNMP NMS Security on page 8 65 to set up SNMP trap managers 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 17 Configuration Setting Up Management For remote sites only SNMP management needs to be set up For the central site local management between the unit and the router must be set up along with SNMP management B gt Procedure To set up SNMP management 1 Select General SNMP Management Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management 2 Minimally set Name 1 Access to Read Write 3 Save your entries B gt Procedure To set up local management at the central site unit
80. 1 891 9124 M1 001 Description Part Number Feature Number RJ48C T1 Network Cable 035 0209 2031 RJ48C to RJ48C RJ49C 20 feet 6 1 meters T1 Line Interface Cable 035 0221 2031 RJ48C to CA81A 20 feet 6 1 meters For use in Canada Standard EIA 232 Straight Through Cable 035 0313 1431 D Sub9 to DB25 for PC serial port 14 feet 4 3 meters Custom unkeyed 8 pin plug to 8 pin plug 035 0315 1431 modular cable 14 feet 4 3 meters Used as a LANA 3100 F 1 500 3100 F 1 510 3100 F2 550 3100 F2 910 DSX 1 Adapter Cable 035 0386 0031 9008 F 1 560 RJ48C to DB15 1 foot 0 3048 meters Standard EIA 232 D Crossover Cable 035 0336 1431 connects COM Port to external device DB25 to RJ48 14 feet 4 3 meters May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Index Numbers Subnet Mask Annex A and D LMI Protocol 1MPort auto configuration ANSI Performance Report Messages 1Port auto configuration application using the unit in your network 3 1 55 hexadecimal test pattern 11 18 KAP inverse 11 5 assign A DSX 1 timeslots frame relay timeslots abortin tests 11 16 j pac timeslots and cross connections 8 36 Access o assigning Dial In 8 75 es community names and access levels Type IP addresses and subnet masks AT commanas Access Level 9 11 9 99 11 At a Glance report assigning Port Banu eaony ante trap C 4 security 4 1 Auto Configuration 1
81. 135 18 4 0 135 18 3 1 135 18 6 1 Physical Connection FR Frame Relay PVC Connection 97 14914 01 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary B 9 IP Addressing Assigning IP Addresses and Subnet Masks Once you select an IP scheme assign an address or addresses to the access unit m f one IP address is wanted for the FrameSaver unit set node IP address and subnet mask If anIP address is wanted for each interface assign a separate IP address and subnet mask to each interface If using Then COM port as a Assign the node IP address and subnet mask or the management interface COM port IP address and subnet mask Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication Communication Protocol COM port connected toan Configure an IP address and subnet mask to dial out traps external modem using the alarm directory Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Alarm Or configure the IP address and subnet mask Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication Communication Protocol Management PVC asa Assign IP addresses and subnet masks to each PVC or management interface to the node IP address if only one IP address per unit is desired Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication Management PVCs B 10 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaul
82. 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 1 of 4 SNMP Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit sends trap messages to the currently configured SNMP trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages Disable Does not send trap messages Number of Trap Managers Possible Settings 1 6 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that will receive SNMP trap messages from the FrameSaver unit An NMS IP Address must be configured in the NMS n IP Address configuration option for each trap manager to receive trap messages 1 6 Specifies the number of trap managers inclusive NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager s to receive SNMP traps Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the IP address for the trap manager Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros Destination Possible Settings Default COM PVCname Default Setting Default Specifies the network destination for the Trap Manager number configuration option Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the
83. 399 399 533 533 655 Default Setting 0 133 Permits a standard DSX signal to be delivered over a distance of up to 655 feet 0 133 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 133 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 133 266 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 266 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 266 399 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 399 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 399 533 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 533 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 533 655 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 655 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE Send All Ones on DSX 1 Failure Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether action is taken when a valid signal cannot be recovered for the DSX 1 LOS continuous OOF or AIS Enable Sends all ones on the DSO channels allocated to the DSX 1 interface in the event of an LOS AIS or continuous OOS condition on the DSX 1 interface Disable No action is taken when a signal fails on the DSX 1 interface The data received is passed through the network interface channels unchanged May 1999 Preliminary 8 33 Configuration Configuring Data Port Physical Options 8 34 Select Physical to display or change the physical characteristics of the data port connected to the DTE see Table
84. 4 3 8 4 4 Session Active 10 13 accessing NetScout Manager Plus Seung up 8 10 acronyms and terms glossary adding B DLCI records back door access when locked out SLV units to network P re back to back Mode Active 10 13 aggregated summary back to back operation 3 15 aggregation application backing up to a node 3 12 AIS Backspace alarm conton I Backup applications at DSX 1 Bo 8 49 at Network Be LED BECN linkDown trap Bit Stuffing Alarm blank field value Fail branches menus adding manually burst conditions editing analysis ranges 5 8 LED is lit RMON defaults C using template 6 8 ALM LED Call Retry Alternate capacity Dial Out Directory CGA IP Address changing software revision auto configuration 8 11 9124 A2 GH30 00 March 1999 Index configuration options domains and groups 6 6 FR Discovery mode operating mode software release Character rena ezi matching CIR bps Circuit Identifier 8 31 Clearing cross connection assignments Event LMI existing information clearing oe Clock Invert Transmit Source Transmit COM port connector creating a separate management link combining private and public addressing on same network Committed Burst Size Bc Bits Committed Information Rate CIR Communication Port user interface options 8 71 Community Name 8 60 assigning Concord N
85. 4 A2 GH30 00 Using the OpenLane NMS In most cases transmission characteristics of the customer s data rather than the network is the cause of apparent network problems This summary allows you to determine the following Overutilization of the network trying to deliver amounts of data well over CIR Data frames that are too large or small More packets are being sent than the receiving node can receive due to differences in physical circuit capacity Any of these will cause the network switch s egress queue to fill increasing latency and data loss Correlate the time at which a problem occurred to the following graphs Transmit Bit Burst Analysis As CIR Shows network utilization bursting details to aid in determining the cause of frame relay lost packets and or excessive network latency Tx Bit Burst Analysis is measured in megabits and shows the exact distribution of transmitted data in relation to the DLCI s CIR and excess burst size The color displayed indicates whether the DLCI is or is coming close to exceeding its purchased CIR and excess burst size Color of CIR Indication Blue Less than or Packets are within CIR equal to 99 Gold 100 199 Packets are at or over CIR Pink 200 299 Packets are two times greater than the contracted CIR Aqua 300 399 Packets are three times greater than the contracted CIR Yellow More than 399 Packets are four times greater than the contracted CIR
86. AN Element AttantaToLargo2 DLCl19 22 00 Kis 32 000 Kbs Bandwidth Int FECH in iframestseci i on he PEN o FECH Out iran sec 1 orn W5 e256 g BECH In tameas aec i aTi PIS Bytes th Eye BECH Oa dramasi sac pret 4 eae Ar TH OG i 4K PE aK i A aimans Eid L T T T T T 1 o rT TT amp T TT TT 1 DE Frans fo irais a a a a a a oO S Se Ss S S75 5 Byles Oud yh se 1 tut a n Se Se Se S DE Framas Oul rames saci i BIE Frames Im iamas p 6 a3 B Anvailakdiby i 5 Z o Frames 14 hameas siec i i E fi se Fj s a ae es g ral oF ra G Fa r Gh Time Auto Range Custom eae es 105 67 Abd From piiga t200 AM To 05201996 11 59 Phi 7 18 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Concord s Network Health The At a Glance report below is the first Network Health report to integrate the FrameSaver SLV s unique monitoring capabilities using the unit s SLV enhanced network statistics Paradyne Frame Saver SLV Plus At a Glance Report WAN Element Largo RedBank dici 10 895 Bytes in bytes sec Latency Maximum Average meach ERE ahh 2K HR aoe ene Burst Out Distribution bytes sec THIR 1H THR TRER z 12E aK oO z T_T TTT TY E Gauri Rangel E Bursi Range E Gust Range 3 Frames in frames sec E Burst Range 4 E Burst Range rat oN Network Frame Drops s80 Bytes Out bytes sec PHD au an an zi hh fe Frames
87. B test loops the received signal on a DTE interface back to the DTE without affecting the operation of the remaining ports Use this test for isolating problems on the DTE interface An attached device or test equipment must generate data to be looped back DSX Network Interface Interface gt DTLB DTLB DTE DTE Port 2 Port 1 98 16190 CAUTION DTE Loopback may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port Any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted 11 24 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting IP Ping Test An IP Ping test can be run to test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver unit router or NMS to which it has a route Times when you might want to run an IP Ping test are To test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver unit in the network to verify that the path is operational Select Procedure 1 to Ping any far end FrameSaver unit To verify the entire path between a newly installed remote site FrameSaver unit and the central site NMS During a remote site installation an IP Ping test is typically run from the remote site to Ping the NMS at the central site The remote FrameSaver unit must have SNMP trap managers configured and one of those trap managers must be the central site NMS Select Procedure 2 on page 11 26 to Ping the NMS at the central site To test the path to the NMS trap managers d
88. Changes DLCI Type from Multiplexed to Standard for the selected Network DLCI Creates a standard PVC connection between this Network DLCI and frame relay link DLCI nnnn see Configuring PVC Connections on page 8 51 Leave as Multiplexed DLCI The DLCI Type remains unchanged You must delete the DLCI connection before you can change the DLCI Type B gt Procedure To create additional DLCI records 1 Press Esc to return to the previous DLCI Records screen Helpful Hint Once you create the first DLCI record you can use the CopyFrom function to create additional records assigning a unique number to each new DLCI record Example First DLCI numbered 16 Second DLCI numbered 17 2 Select New or the CopyFrom function and press Enter 8 48 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 9 DLCI Record Options 1 of 2 DLCI Number Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the number for the DLCI in the DLCI record The parameter determines which DLCI record is used for transferring data on a particular frame relay interface DLCI numbers range from 0 to 1023 However the numbers 0 15 and 1008 1023 are reserved Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out of Range 16 1007 If the DLCI number is part of a connection this field is read only NOTES Ifa DLCI number is not entered the DLCI record is not
89. Connection is via the existing DTE cable between the router s DTE interface and the T1 access unit In the following examples data is not routed by the FrameSaver units and management PVCs are not configured between them Instead management data for the remote FrameSaver units is routed through the routers with management PVCs configured between the routers and FrameSaver units Connection is via the existing DIE cable between the router s DTE interface and the access unit The illustration below shows all FrameSaver units on the same subnet and all routers on the same subnet Subnet 135 18 1 0 SNMP NMS FR Router 135 18 2 2 FR Router 135 18 1 1 FR Router Frame 135 18 2 1 Relay 135 18 3 3 Network 135 18 3 1 FR Router Subnet 135 18 3 0 192 10 2 6 Subnet 135 18 2 0 FR Frame Relay Physical Connection ALAGOA PVC Connection B 8 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 IP Addressing The following illustration is a more complex example in which each FrameSaver unit is on its own subnet having a subnet mask of FF FF FF 00 255 255 255 0 This subnet is independent of the subnet on the LAN supported by the local router Subnet Subnet 135 18 5 0 Subnet 135 18 1 0 135 18 2 0 135 18 5 2 SNMP NMS FR Router 135 18 2 1 FR Router 135 18 1 1 FR Router Subnet Subnet 135 18 6 0 mame AA 135 18 4 1 Relay eee 135 18 6 2 Network 135 18 4 2 FR Router FR Router Subnet
90. DLCls are multiplexed with a management diagnostic EDLC embedded DLCI being created When management PVCs are multiplexed with user data PVCs two DLCls are created from the network DLCI one matching DLCI for user data on Port 1 and another for management Mgmt information lf the unit at the other end is not a FrameSaver unit PVC diagnostic tests and SLV communication between FrameSaver units are disruptive to user data PVCs configured for non Paradyne units should not be multiplexed This is because only FrameSaver models currently support PVC multiplexing and PVC diagnostics The following illustrations show the DLCI records and PVC connections created when a particular Frame Relay Discovery Mode is selected The tables show the automatic configuration that takes place within the FrameSaver unit Refer to Setting Up Auto Configuration in Chapter 8 Configuration for additional information This example shows the 1 port management application 1MPort DTEs E DLCI201_ To Te Aw Pony co DLCI 201 S Frame DLCI 201 ___ re ple ae Relay Port 2 NET Port Network Network Side User Side Contains 3 EDLCls of LMI of LMI Port 1 Port 2 Physical Connection Management Mgmt PVC Connection 97 15398a FR Discovery Source Source Destination Destination Destination Mode Selection Interface DLCI Interface Link DLCI EDLCI o One port with Port 1 DLCI 201 Ne
91. Disable Unit resets itself Reload Factory Defaults All configuration and control settings are reset to the Default Factory Configuration overwriting the current configuration Unit resets itself CAUTION This causes the current configuration to be destroyed and a Self Test to be performed If no selection is made within 30 seconds or if No n is entered the unit resets itself and no configuration changes are made Once the unit resets itself connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen appears 11 4 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Alarms 9124 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting The following table describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap for a physical interface and the frame relay LMIs and DLCls These alarm conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System and Test Status screen Main Menu gt Status System and Test Status Table 11 1 Alarm Conditions 1 of 4 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do AIS at Network 1 An Alarm Indication Signal For the network interface report AIS is being received by the problem to your T1 service the interface AIS is an provider unframed all ones signal AIS at DSX 1 For the DSX 1 interface For the DSX 1 interface check the attached DTE is the DTE attached to the transmitting an AIS interface CTS down to The CTS control lead on Check DTR and RTS from Slot s Port p Device the device s in
92. Dyka Enpre PPAR PFIN fi ate Hot T i pF DE E i f B PARADE TI PromeSover SLi ae 1 TOFA iby jbm jiii E bgm C Lae Ipi tr JES es i a oe Lo ho Ss ey S CESIL Cei AT Correlate the time at which a problem occurred to the following graphs Capacity Shows what percent of the physical link is being used A measurement is provided for both incoming and outgoing data The percentage is based upon line speed Throughput Shows the actual volume of data in kilobits per second for both incoming and outgoing data over a physical link The line speed is also shown so you can easily see when the link s physical capacity is about to be exceeded 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 5 11 Using the OpenLane NMS Heaviest Users Output Shows which DLCls are generating the most traffic over the frame relay link Up to three high volume DLCls can be shown This information can be viewed in two forms Graph The data shown for each DLCI is a percent of the line speed over time Up to three high volume DLCls can be shown Pie Chart The data shown for each DLCI is a percent of the total output per the most recent snapshot NOTE Position the cursor over a particular DLCI within the graph and press the right mouse button to display a menu which includes the DLCI s exact of Capacity In the pie chart the of Capacity for the unused por
93. E configuring port using a management DLCI Loopback 11 24 Port 1 LEDs 10 5 port connector pin assignments port initiated loopbacks DTLB 11 24 DTR down 11 5 down from Port 1 Device 10 14 Ignore Control Leads E EDLCI Destination management using PVC multiplexing Source total number March 1999 IN 3 Index EER alarm condition at Network LED linkDown trap EIA 232C COM Port connector elements DLCls summary report Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLC end to end data delivery success ending a session Enter Return key 4 6 entering phone numbers system information Enterprise Specific Traps 8 66 8 68 C 7 equipment list Error Event LMI free seconds 5 18 messages 5 9 errored frames seconds Errors frame relay statistics 10 31 LMI signaling transmission Esc key 4 6 ESF Line statistics 10 33 even parity 8 71 exception points exceptions report Excess Burst Size Bits Excessive Error Rate linkDown trap Error Rate Threshold executive service level report External Device COM Port options 8 75 Commands controlling access 9 10 Transmit Clock IN 4 F faceplates 9124 10 3 FDR features FECN 5 19 feedback how to provide via the Web A field is blank empty file transfer 10 36 FTP file transfer protocol Session 8 63 Frame Delivery Ratio FDR 1 4 siz
94. FrameSaver SLV 9124 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Document No 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 PRELIMINARY DRAFT KANADINA on Copyright 1999 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved Printed in U S A Notice This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Avenue North P O Box 2826 Largo Florida 33779 2826 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual Warranty Sales Service and Training Information Contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service rep
95. H30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 7 3 Concord s Network Health Configuring the Discovered Elements Network Health sets the speed for discovered elements when it polls the unit for the first time For a FrameSaver SLV unit the speed set would be the unit s CIR No additional configuration should be required However you should verify that all appropriate information has been retrieved If an SLV unit does not have CIR configured or it is not configured correctly Network Health sets the unit s CIR to 0 kbps For this reason you should reconfigure the unit s CIR before Network Health polls it If 0 kbps is the speed setting you will need to edit the unit s CIR from Network Health Additional information that can be edited includes Element name Community string Polling status and rates SNMP index for the interface Agent type Desciption information See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information B gt Procedure To change the CIR for FrameSaver SLV unit elements from Network Health 1 Select the Edit Before Saving button at the bottom of the Discovering dialog box once the discovery process is completed The Poller Configuration window opens 2 Double click on the first element discovered The Modify Element dialog box opens 3 Inthe Speed box select the Override radio button and enter the CIR for the unit in the text box Letters k and m can be used as short
96. IP Performance Wizard Protocol SLV address resolution resetting Link the unit 11 3 LMI unit default configuration options IN 8 March 1999 9124 A2 GH30 00 resetting statistics cee communication with a misconfigured unit 11 4 restoring connectivity retrieving statistics Return Enter key 4 6 revision software and hardware RFC 1213 and 1573 RFC 1315 RFC 1406 RFC 1490 routers for transparent management RFC 1604 RFC 1659 RFC 1757 RFC 2021 right arrow key RIP 1 5 RJ48C COM Port connector RLB 11 21 RMON alarm and event defaults Specific Traps Traps user history collection round trip network latency router independence Routing Information Protocol RIP on same subnet using different subnets B 7 using routers B 8 running reports S Sampling SLV Inband and Interval saving configuration options screen area function keys area 4 5 how to navigate 4 6 scrolling through valid selections Secondary Clock Failed Source 8 27 security SNMP NMS options selecting a field an IP addressing scheme B 1 9124 A2 GH30 00 Index from a menu management interface Self Test Results messages 10 12 Send 511 test pattern C 11 All Ones on DSX 1 Failure and monitor test pattern test pattern 11 18 serial number NAM Service A service level agreement customer report executive report IT manager me reports verification stati
97. IP Information on page 8 11 5 Set Primary Link RIP to Standard_Out 6 Save your configuration 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 19 Configuration Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity 8 20 lf management needs to be set up between a service provider s customer and its network operations center NOC a non multiplexed DLCI must be configured to carry management data between the customer s central site and the NOC console This requires that a frame relay discovered DLCI needs to be modified This is because all auto configured network DLCls are configured as multiplexed DLCls B gt Procedure To set up NOC management 1 Select DLCI Records on the network interface Configuration Network DLC Records Select Modify The Modify DLCI Record for DLCI Number prompt appears Select the DLCI that will be used by pressing the spacebar until the correct DLCI number appears then select it Change the DLCI Type from Multiplexed to Standard The Delete EDLCI Connections and Make it a Mgmt Only PVC prompt appears Type y Yes and press Enter PVC connections for the selected DLCI are broken the Port 1 DLCI mapped to this network DLCI and the embedded management DLCI EDLCI are deleted and the selected DLCI will be reconfigured as a management PVC using the Node IP Address May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Setting Up for Back to Back Operation Using this special feature
98. In this example the FrameSaver units use their physical connection to the T1 or DDS network to gain access to the frame relay network via logical PVC connections FrameSaver 9624 units operate at 56 kbps full duplex as shown or 64 kbps clear channel operation when available in an area Access to the DDS network is through the unit s RJ48S interface Using FrameSaver 9124 units fractional T1 T1 access to the frame relay service is through a frame relay router connected to each FrameSaver unit Using their physical connection to the T1 network the FrameSaver units gain access to the frame relay network via logical PVC connections Access to the T1 network is through the unit s RJ48C interface The application configurations in the following sections show this access 3 6 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Typical Applications Mixing FrameSaver Units in Applications Deciding which frame relay FrameSaver unit is needed at a central or remote site is a matter of evaluating the site s traffic volume to determine the amount of network access required FT1 T1 or 56 64 kbps A large central site s requirement for high speed and high volume indicates the need for a FrameSaver 9124 unit at this site Connecting a RMON probe to the FrameSaver unit and using NMS application software that supports RMON MIBs will provide full remote monitoring capability at the site However the amount of traffic at a remote or central site may
99. Interface Alarm Defaults 0 ccc cece ees C 15 Static Frame Relay Interface Alarm Defaults 005 Dynamic Frame Relay Interface Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area 000 cece eens C 19 Static DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area 0 005 Dynamic DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area 5 Object ID OID Cross Reference Numeric Order viii May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Contents D Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments Rear PANGS ererrranini oe ones eee peed beet ona beens eae D 1 m COM Port Connector aca ccant ca w iwa awaneaa dae e sake eA aande 4 enk es Gare vos D 2 LAN Adapter Converter and Cable 00 0000 cece eee D 4 Standard ElIA 232 D Crossover Cable 000 cece eens D 5 m Port 1 Connector ws asia kate amp db canaaee amp de ne bs db eh oe re DS RS de D 7 Standard V 35 Straight through Cable 0 c ce eee nes Standard V 35 Crossover Cable 00 0 cece eee e eee e ae m 11 Network Cable 3100 F1 500 0c cceeeecececeececeeeees Canadian T1 Line Interface Cable 3100 F1 510 D 9 m DSX 1 Connector sooo heue consis hae awe nage ane nanana D 10 DSX 1 Adapter 9008 F1 560 0 cee D 10 E Technical Specifications F Equipment List E EQUIDMENG rrksapiani iidse oie ede bom a kes R E E E E aS F 1 e ODES aeee e oe ere ee en E EA F 2
100. Internal loops frames back to the selected interface on a per PVC basis This test logically not physically loops back frames from one FrameSaver unit node through the frame relay PVC to the same FrameSaver unit node Main Menu gt Test gt Network PVC Tests Port 1 PVC Tests gt PVC Loopback If the selected DLCI is Then the PVC Loopback is Standard Disruptive to data Proprietary multiplexed Nondisruptive to data Network PVC Loopback PVC x Network PVC x 98 16186 Port PVC Loopback DTE PVC x PVC x Network lt e S ee ee Fs ee 98 16187 May 1999 Preliminary 11 17 Troubleshooting Send Pattern This test sends frames filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence number over the selected interface on a per DLCI basis Main Menu gt Test gt Network PVC Tests Port 1 PVC Tests gt Send Pattern If the selected And the default DLCI is configured as Then Rate Kbps setting is Standard Disruptive appears 100 of CIR after Test Multiplexed Non Disruptive appears 10 of CIR after Test If the CIR is zero the pattern will be sent at a rate of 1000 bps Monitor Pattern This test monitors packets for the 55 test pattern and checks sequence numbers using a proprietary method Main Menu gt Test gt Network PVC Tests Port 1 PVC Tests gt Monitor Pattern The current number of sequence and data errors are shown under the Result column
101. LC Table 10 11 DLCI Performance Statistics 1 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates DLCI Up Since 1 Date and time that the DLCI was last declared Active after a period of inactivity Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive If the DLCI was Down this is the time that the DLCI recovered If the DLCI was never Down this is the first time the FrameSaver unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network DLCI Up Time Days hours minutes and seconds since the DLCI was last declared Active after a period of inactivity Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive If the DLCI was Down this is the amount of time since the DLCI recovered If the DLCI was never Down this is the amount of time since the FrameSaver unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network Tx Rx Characters Number of data octets 8 bit bytes sent received for the selected DLCI on the interface 1 Appears only for the Network interface 10 28 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 10 11 DLCI Performance Statistics 2 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Tx Rx Frames Number of frames sent received for the DLCI on the interface Tx Rx Frames Number of frames sent received for the DLCI on the interface Within CIR that are within the committed information rate that had been configured Tx Rx Frames Number of frames sent received for the DLCI on the interface Exceed CIR that exceed the committed info
102. Le Lbs TP es iE E r e ee HIRI EL Quarrel Lee heb eae Td OCP es i binei ele Large E pes eer Ler era LCM IE Aree dE lE Aree 18 Warts bE bd F Ler ee i Large Teele ae ee il 5 a a 7 i iiba aLa Caw ee Te ee ere were large LETE se ee ee Lo Elma Haalih lieka re E HFE e ee a n i ie HF rime E Palir Trin E ma a Liigid T aiT ee FO FEJA ri Lad Re ee LG a 7 eed LEE krann e BP ee Ten LEF Il May 1999 Preliminary tebe Tes ft eae i ice LU EPEE T ETEA e i E r a Ln a LIEFHE Tee i ets i ESO SAP ei aires aL minm fue sar L Hepes eee mee ih yI al Wl fa HE Pi ca ae Fi i Ti 11 te E 71 a Gf Fi ia ci te JE 11 ta 28 i ii i LP FA Le ee H EE WTI Creare Cdn mis Me vicar dd rie scene 9124 A2 GH30 00 Concord s Network Health these charts show more than ten DLCls at a time so you have a broader view of The information shown in this report is also on other Health reports However the service provided by the network Supplemental Report Lk PS HTF Poe at LTEM Ep i e TEET za Ole Lobe ET ML be a L 2 hd Ee ERL E m TETRA EA HEH jE HETI iRiF 9 pA PLE E A EA LA cps A L iPS 3 ee A EPTLELE ET E 0 BP ELKA te AH if CREA ph H CPLA 1s Bf ff vesecttns t te einai I IRAH E A H RSi H ce a h i mE MTE ere ee ee ta E TP WL I i l 1 d LE LEE l r ALi Dir in
103. MI Personality is set to Network Side of the UNI 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Configuring Service Level Verification Options Select Service Level Verification to display or change the Service Level Verification SLV System configuration options see Table 8 2 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration System Service Level Verification Table 8 2 Service Level Verification Options SLV Sample Interval secs Possible Settings 15 3600 Default Setting 60 Sets the inband communications interval between FrameSaver SLV units Inband communications are used to pass frames that calculate latency as well as transmission success and other SLV information 15 3600 Sets the SLV Sample Interval secs period in seconds inclusive SLV Delivery Ratio Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether communication of Frame and Data Delivery Ratios FDR DDR between FrameSaver units is enabled To use this capability units at both ends of all PVCs must be FrameSaver SLV units If some of the units are FrameSaver 9124s or 9624s they must be running software version 1 2 or higher Enable An extra byte for FDR DDR statistics collection is included with each frame These statistics are used to determine the amount of data dropped by the network Be awa
104. Management Link B gt Procedure To limit Telnet or FTP access when the session is on the TS Management Link 1 Go to the Telnet and FTP Session Options screen Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate Set Telnet Session to Disable Set FIP Session to Disable 3 Return to the Management and Communication menu and select Node IP 4 Set the following configuration options as appropriate Tsss Set the configuration option Disable access via a TS Management Link to None TS Management Link Assign an access level to the TS Management Access Level to Level 2 TS Management Link or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the session e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 telnet access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 5 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support or Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for more information about these configuration options 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 9 5 Security and Logins Controlling SNMP Access The FrameSaver unit supports SNMP Version 1 which only provides limited secur
105. N Adapter 8100 F2 910 Plug to Modular Jack Converter Com Port 8 Position Plug to Plug to DB25 Plug Modular Jack Modular Jack LAN Adapter Tx Clock Rx Data Signal Ground Tx Data Tx Data Signal Ground DTR Rx Data CD CTS RTS Frame Ground Rx Clock Unused 98 16214 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary D 3 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments Standard EIA 232 D Crossover Cable A standard crosso ver cable can be used to connect the COM port to an external modem The external modem must be configured so it is compatible with the FrameSaver u Chassis Ground TXD RXD RTS DSR Signal Ground CD RLSD D 4 a nit See page D 5 to configure an external modem P1 Plug Chassis Ground TXD RXD RTS DSR Signal Ground CD RLSD CO NO OF W DP CO NO OF ON 496 15180 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments B gt Procedure To configure an external modem 1 Disconnect the asynchronous terminal from the standard cable See page D 4 for an illustration of the COM Port connection 2 Reconnect the crossover cable to the external modem 3 Enable auto answer on your modem and configure it to use the following LSD DSR CTS RTS and DTR control leads See the table below for AT DO command strings Use the following command string AT amp CO amp D2 amp SO amp R1 DO SO 1 AT Command String To configure the modem to
106. Out franes sec Frames Out Size Distribution lrames sec 20 aa bei En i i i So Bc o0bytes E lt tend byes E e 0800 bytes PLCI Up Time 26 E 1000 bytes EJ 4000 bytes Link Up Time 5 1E Auto Hango Custom Treated Taaa d kos PA From tO27 1988 09 40 PM To 1271 998 03 39 PM 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 7 19 Concord s Network Health Trend Reports 7 20 Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report e g burst octets however a bandwidth trend report shown here should be generated when investigating problems that appear on m Exceptions Reports see page 7 9 Supplemental Report see page 7 13 Health Reports You can specify total bandwidth both incoming and outgoing data only incoming data bandwidth or only outgoing data bandwidth The trend report calculates the bandwidth for the data based upon the data rate and the amount of data in bytes Network Health Trend Report AlN Toa DLC as Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCls having a high Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a DLCl s poor Health Index rating For additional information about trend reports see LAN WAN Trend Reports in the Network Health Reports Guide May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Setup and configuration instructions are included in the FrameSaver SLV 9124 Installation Instru
107. Paradyne provided file and when An unsupported domain needs to be deleted A missing domain needs to be added Groups Samples Interval and Logging are not configured as specified in Step 3 of Verifying Domains and Groups on page 6 5 B gt Procedure 1 Select the the Property button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window The Property Editor window opens Property Editor Shared Type FrameRelay Samples Interval Logging Domain Groups SH SH LH Stat Host Cony Add Edie Delete l Variable Rising Falling Add eaa e Delete 2 To delete an unsupported domain click on the domain from the Domains list then select the Delete button The Are you sure prompt appears Select Yes The unsupported domain disappears from the list 3 To add a FrameSaver SLV supported domain or correct property settings select the Edit button to the right of the Domain section of the Property Editor window The Edit Domain window opens 6 6 May 1999 Preliminary Using NetScout Manager Plus Edit Domain Domaing Logging PH Ou Pgri iig Enable Disable sts Enable Disable Conversations Disable Disable Short Term History samples seconds Long Term History samples seconds Cancel 4 Click on the domain from the Domains list and configure the following Property Description Setting Groups Stats S Statistics collection Enabled for al
108. Received Forward explicit congestion notification FECN has been sent by the network warning that inbound frames may encounter congestion and may be dropped FECNs seconds Duration over which FECNs were received Congested seconds Duration over which BECNs and FECNSs were received BECNs and FECNs indicate network congestion issues Frames marked DE indicate that the DLCI is partly responsible for the network congestion the DLCI has exceeded its contracted CIR When congestion is detected on the network select the Congestion button under the menu bar to verify whether the DLCI is the cause for the problem See Chapter 11 Displaying System Information for additional information on these types of errors 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 5 19 Using the OpenLane NMS Frame Relay DLCI Congestion Although used primarily for capacity planning and CIR negotiations this group of graphs can be used to assess whether a DLCI is contributing to network congestion a a ia i m B 5 20 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Using the OpenLane NMS Correlate the time at which a problem occurred to the following graphs Capacity Shows how a DLCs capacity is being used for both incoming and outgoing data When the DLCI s allocated bandwidth is underutilized it is time to renegotiate CIR and excess burst size agreements The DLCI s capacity is calculated based upon its data rate and CIR which
109. Saver unit through a management PVC The illustration below shows three separate management PVCs one for each remote FrameSaver unit SNMP NMS Ethernet Frame Relay DLCI 201 Network IP Address 135 18 40 3 135 18 2 1 Subnet 135 18 2 0 Subnet 135 18 40 0 Physical Connection PVC Connection 98 16217 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary B 5 IP Addressing Routing to Remote FrameSaver Units on the Same Subnet In this example FrameSaver unit A is connected to The NMS atthe central site Remote FrameSaver units through management PVCs The illustration below shows two management PVCs at the central site with FrameSaver units B and C connected through one management PVC SNMP NMS Ethernet 135 18 40 1 Relay Router 135 18 2 1 Subnet 135 18 2 0 Subnet 135 18 40 0 Physical Connection PVC Connection 98 16218 B 6 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 IP Addressing Routing to Remote FrameSaver Units Using Different Subnets In this example FrameSaver unit A is connected to The NMS atthe central site Two remote FrameSaver units through management PVCs The illustration below shows two management PVCs with FrameSaver units B and C connected through one management PVC By configuring a different IP address and subnet for each management PVC m FrameSaver units B and C share a subnet 135 18 3 0 FrameSaver units A and B share a different subnet 135 18 2 0 m FrameSave
110. Send Pattern test cannot be started when the following tests are running m Any Loopback on the same interface m Send Pattern Test on any port assigned to this network interface m Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous and assigned to this network interface B gt Procedure To send and monitor a Pattern Test 1 Follow this menu selection sequence to display the Tests screen Main Menu Test Network Physical Tests DSX 1 Physical Tests 2 Select the desired pattern in the Send or Monitor field If sending monitoring a user defined pattern enter the the desired 2 byte hexadecimal value in the field next to Send or Monitor When sending a pattern the Inject ERR function key appears Use Inject ERR if you want to inject a bit error in the transmitted bit pattern 3 Highlight the Send command to send a pattern or the Start command to monitor a pattern and press Enter to start the test or start monitoring it 4 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column An error count is also displayed When monitoring a pattern the ResetMon virtual function key appears ResetMon resets the error count to zero 5 Highlight Stop and press Enter to stop the test 6 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column May 1999 Preliminary 11 23 Troubleshooting DTE Loopback The DTE external Loopback DTL
111. Sub 15 socket D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet 0 196 5 meters Selectable 34 position V 35 connector V 35 ITU ISO 2593 Variations for T1 rates automatically set to the network rate 9124 A2 GH30 00 Equipment List Equipment See page F 2 for cables you can order Model Feature Description Number FrameSaver SLV Units FrameSaver SLV 9124 T1 Remote Site with 64 PVCs 9124 A2 201 Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 Vac Power Supply Network Cable and Documentation FrameSaver SLV 9124 T1 Central Site with 120 PVCs 9124 A2 204 Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 Vac Power Supply Network Cable and Documentation Power Supplies 100 240 Vac for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F 1 040 120 Vac for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F 1 020 FrameSaver Management Package for Windows 7700 P 1 001 Includes OpenLane DCE Manager 4 2 OpenLane Performance Wizard 4 2 and NetScout Manager Plus 5 5 for Windows FrameSaver Management Package for Unix 7800 P1 001 Includes OpenLane DCE Manager 4 3 OpenLane Performance Wizard 4 3 and NetScout Manager Plus 5 5 for Unix NetScout Server For Unix or Windows NT NetScout WebCast For Unix For Windows NT 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary F 1 Equipment List Cables Optional Features Wall Mounting Kit for 1 Slot Housing User Manual FrameSaver SLV 9124 User s Guide Paper Manual This table lists cables you can order Model Feature Number 9001 F
112. System and Test Status Test Status screen screen oie al Reset the unit and try again Contact your service representative An LED appears LED is burned out Run the Lamp Test If the LED in dysfunctional question does not flash with the other LEDs then contact your service representative Not receiving data Network cable loose or Reconnect or repair the cable broken Call the network service T1 network is down provider Receiving data errors FR Discovery is being used Change the DLCI Type for each on a multiplexed DLCI for automatic DLC and network DLCI from Multiplexed to but frame relay is PVC configuration Standard turning off okay multiplexing The equipment at the other end is not frame relay RFC 1490 compliant or the unit at one end of the PVC does not support the Data Delivery Ratio feature 11 10 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting Frame Relay PVC Problems 9124 A2 GH30 00 Table 11 3 Frame Relay PVC Problems Symptom Possible Cause Solutions Cross Connection of the DLCls are configured incorrectly No receipt or transmission of data Verify the PVC connections DLCls and CIRs agree with those of the service provider by checking the network discovered DLCls DLCI is inactive on the frame relay network m Verify that the DLCI s is active on the PVC Connection Status screen If the DLCI s is not active contact the servic
113. Typical Applications for an illustration The Port 1 CTS control Check DTR and RTS from lead on the FrameSaver Port 1 unit is off CTS down to Port 1 Device May 1999 Preliminary 10 13 Operation and Maintenance 10 14 Table 10 6 Health and Status Messages 2 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do 1 Provide the displayed 8 digit An internal error has been detected by the operating software Device Fail yyyyyyyy DLCI nnnn Down frame relay link 1 2 DTR down from Port 1 The DTR control lead on Device the device connected to Port n is disasserted The DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down EER at Network n The error rate of the received network signal exceeds the currently configured threshold This condition only occurs if the network interface is configured for ESF framing This condition clears when the error rate falls below the threshold value which may take up to 15 minutes nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following failure code yyyyyyyy to your service representative 2 Clear the Device Fail message Main Menu gt Control Clear Device Fail Verify that the network LMI is up If it is contact network provider Examine the attached DTE and cable connected to the FrameSaver unit s port 1 Check that the Port 1 cable is securely attached at both ends Check the status of the
114. VC s Primary Destination No action needed Enter a security record Try again Contact your system administrator to verify your password 10 9 Operation and Maintenance Table 10 4 Device Messages 5 of 6 Message What It Indicates What To Do Permission Denied Seen at an FTP terminal Please Wait Resetting Device Please Wait Test Active User Interface Already in Use A file transfer was attempted but the User did not have Level 1 security Wrong file was specified when the put command was entered User attempted to upload a program file from the unit Command takes longer than 5 seconds Yes or y was entered in the Reset COM Port usage field of the System Paused menu No higher priority health and status messages exist and a test is running Two Telnet sessions are already in use when an attempt to access the async user interface through the COM or modem port is made Two Telnet sessions are already in use when an attempt to access the menu driven user interface through the COM port is made IP addresses and logins of the users currently accessing the interface are also provided 10 10 May 1999 Preliminary See your system administrator to get your security level changed m Try again entering the correct file with the put command Enter the put command instead of a get command you can only transfer files to the unit not from
115. Web site B gt Procedure To access Paradyne MIBs 1 2 3 Access the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com Select Service amp Support Select Management Information Base MIBs The download procedure may vary depending upon your browser or NMS application software Refer to your browser or NMS manual for additional download information May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps NextEDGE units with their special operational trap features comply with SNMP format standards All traps have an associated string to help you decipher the meaning of the trap Strings associated with an interface with a substring containing ifString have the following format DLCI diciNumber of ifName frame relay link linkName dlciNumber is the DLCI number DLC diciNumber only appears when a DLCI is associated with the trap linkName is the name given to the link Frame relay linkName only appears when a frame relay link is associated with the trap ifName is the string returned for the SNMP ifName variable Example DLCI 100 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay In this example a DLCI and a frame relay link are associated with the trap The NextEDGE unit supports the following traps warmStart on page C 3 authenticationFailure on page C 4 m linkUp and linkDown on page C 4 m enterprise Specif
116. When zero CIR has been configured the percentage breakdowns are based on link speed instead of CIR If utilization is consistently under 50 of CIR the CIR contracted for should be downgraded If over 100 the DLCI may be ready for its CIR to be upgraded When a DLCI is overutilizing the network compare the Tx Bit Burst Analysis graph against the following graphs to determine the cause End to End Data Delivery Success to see if frames are being dropped Round Trip Network Latency to see if the bursting is impacting latency May 1999 Preliminary 5 23 Using the OpenLane NMS 5 24 Round Trip Network Latency Shows how fast the network is moving traffic Latency is the amount of time it takes a frame relay frame to travel from one CPE end point to another and back The times at which an average of the frame relay frames are calculated is shown along the bottom while the delay is shown in milliseconds Any excessive spikes or increases in latency should be investigated further It could indicate a network problem or it could indicate that the DLCI is oversubscribed exceeding CIR and is sending frames that are filling up the network switch s egress queue delaying network traffic To determine the exact cause of the delay compare the Round Trip Network Latency graph against the following graphs to determine the cause Transmit Bit Burst Analysis As CIR to see distribution of transmitted data in relation to
117. a and the Configuration Edit Display screen appears NOTE Loading a configuration with many DLCls from a unit s Customer Configuration 1 or 2 option area may take time Allow a minute or more for the file to be loaded Changing Configuration Options B gt Procedure To change configuration option settings 1 From the Configuration Edit Display screen select the configuration option set you want to view or make changes to and press Enter Select the configuration options applicable to your network and make appropriate changes to the setting s When creating new PVC connections or management PVCs some configuration options will be blank For a valid setting to appear Tab to the configuration option and press the spacebar 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all changes are complete 8 8 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Saving Configuration Options When all changes to the configuration options are complete use the Save function key to save configuration option changes to either the Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 Configuration areas To save the configuration option changes from DCE Manager for Windows Click on the Set button at the bottom of the file folder where the change was made m DCE Manager for Unix Click on the Apply button at the bottom of the window where the change was made Menu Driven User Interface Select the Save function key The procedure is described
118. a dedicated DLCI is typically used by service providers to provide a single point of access i e a standard nonmultiplexed DLCI usually to the customer s central site unit to manage the customer s network See Service Provider Management Overview on page 2 3 for a typical service provider configuration Nonmultiplexed DLCls must be used when in band management communication is desired between any non FrameSaver unit and a FrameSaver unit Management FrameSaver Data Unit A Non FrameSaver ALU OU Frame es eee Unit B Relay Network Network Physical Connection Operation PVC Connection Sale Using Dedicated PVC 99 16282 As shown in the example in band management is accomplished through the dedicated PVC between the two units Management data for non FrameSaver Unit B goes to FrameSaver Unit A first which then routes it into the dedicated PVC between the two units Only management data is carried over the PVC source DLCI 60 to destination DLCI 20 If using this method to access remote sites map or subinterface statements must be added to the router at the central site to ensure that management traffic destined for the remote site units is routed to the FrameSaver unit at the central site by the router Once traffic gets to the central site FrameSaver unit it is rerouted to the appropriate remote site FrameSaver units NOTE The router to be used for management must configure a local PVC between
119. a mix of FrameSaver products The example that follows illustrates this It shows two remote sites supporting data only service one using a FrameSaver 9624 or 9620 unit and one site providing voice service as well as remote monitoring using a FrameSaver 9120 or 9124 PBX FT1 FrameSaver psX 1 Network 9120 Access T Unit Frame lt L j FR a Relay Network Based Voice Service Physical Connection 98 15872 In this illustration the remote site shown as a 9120 unit can be a 9124 as shown in the SLV Frame Relay Access on page 3 3 May 1999 Preliminary 3 9 Typical Applications PVC Multiplexing Application When FrameSaver units are at each end of the circuit the FrameSaver unit provides the ability to multiplex data of multiple DLCls onto a single network DLCI This feature is referred to as PVC multiplexing PVC multiplexing allows PVC diagnostic tests to be run without disrupting data and uses the following network configuration Customer Data Frame Relay Network FrameSaver Relay Relay eel lh a Router Router Physical Connection PVCs Contain y Multiplexed PVC Connection Management _ EDLCls and FR Frame Relay 99 16283 Customer Data The example shows frame relay data coming in over Port 1 with the frames being multiplexed onto a single network connection PVCs are aggregated in the same manner This sharing of PVCs i e multiplexing user DLCIs
120. addresses and masks routing using different routing using same IN 10 March 1999 Subnet Mask 8 57 8 73 8 76 ae suggestions user documentation A summary aggregated element DLCI report leaders report network report supplemental report 7 13 switching between screen to new software System and test status messages 10 12 configuring options displaying information entering information Frame Relay and LMI options messages Name Contact and Location 10 2 T1 Canadian line interface cable LMI Heartbeat network cable D 8 network interface options T2 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T3 LMI N4 Measurement Period Tab key TCP 10 36 technical specifications E 1 Telnet limiting access Session user interface options 8 61 Terminal Port Use 8 71 Test menu branch Mode 10 4 Status messages 10 18 Tests aborting 11 16 available 11 12 determining status and results 11 16 DTE Loopback 11 24 Duration IP Ping 9124 A2 GH30 00 Lamp 11 27 Line Loopback 11 19 pattern 11 23 Payload Loopback 11 20 physical 11 19 PVC Loopback 11 17 Remote Line Loopback 11 22 Repeater Loopback 11 21 starting or stopping 11 15 test panem E Timeout throughput time setting 8 5 Timeout ae Test timeslot assignment status timeslot assignments DSX 1 network timeslots 8 36 trademarks A Training A tr
121. agement Link on page 9 5 Controlling SNMP Access on page 9 6 Disabling SNMP Access on page 9 6 Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels on page 9 7 Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses on page 9 8 Controlling External COM Port Device Access on page 9 10 Creating a Login on page 9 11 Deleting a Login on page 9 12 The FrameSaver unit provides access security through the following Asynchronous async terminal Telnet FTP SNMP External devices May 1999 Preliminary Security and Logins Up to two direct or Telnet sessions can be active at any given time that is you can have two simultaneous Telnet sessions or one Telnet session and one active async terminal session or two simultaneous async terminal sessions Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access The FrameSaver unit provides the following methods for limiting direct access to the menu driven user interface on the communication COM port Requiring a login Assigning an access level to the port See Configuring the Communication Port in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for more information about communication port configuration options B gt Procedure To limit COM port access to the menu driven user interface 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Communication Port The Communication Port Options screen appears 2 Select and set the following
122. air installation documentation training distributor locations or Paradyne worldwide office locations use one of the following methods Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com Be sure to register your warranty there Select Service amp Support Warranty Registration Telephone Call our automated system to receive current information by fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 2340 Document Feedback We welcome your comments and suggestions about this document Please mail them to Technical Publications Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 or send e mail to userdoc paradyne com Include the number and title of this document in your correspondence Please include your name and phone number if you are willing to provide additional clarification Trademarks All products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners Patent Notification FrameSaver products are protected by U S Patents 5 550 700 and 5 654 966 Other U S and foreign patents pending A May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Contents About This Guide Purpose and Intended Audience 0 0 cece eee eee Document Organization n anaana aeaaea eedeee ee nane anes Conventions Used 0 ccc na Product Re
123. and the router then let the FrameSaver unit automatically discover the DLCI and convert it to an EDLCI via its Auto Configuration feature DLCI 909 2 This solution eliminates the need for two DLCls per central site FrameSaver unit router set The management PVC would be shared by both the FrameSaver unit and the router DLCI 200 gt as E Frame Relay we Network Qe grein Frame oleae EDLCI 200 es 10 10 10 3 ae H DLCI 909 Ey BDL 210 135 18 2 3 22T een EDLCI 909 0 DLCI 908 SC a DLCI 210 Ray 10 10 10 2 5 ee a Router 3G ye 135 18 2 2 nA Frame O 10 10 10 4 Relay Physical Connection Router PVC Connection 135 18 2 4 Network Operation Center 99 16226 01 Whether automatically discovering or manually configuring DLCls a local management PVC must be created between each FrameSaver unit and its router if management through a back door is desired Using private addresses the router will not pass the DLCI to the network so the PVC is reserved for management only Management through a back door can be accomplished via a dial line to the router Should the network fail communication with both the router and the FrameSaver unit would be maintained In this case one PVC is used for both unit and router management DLCI 909 is used to manage the router DLCI EDLCI 909 2 is used to manage the unit DLCI 908 is a static route from the router for back door managment of the unit
124. annot change configuration options or run tests 8 56 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Configuring Management PVCs 9124 A2 GH30 00 Select Management PVCs to define inband management links by adding or changing Management PVCs see Table 8 12 First DLCI records must have been configured for the interface where the Management PVC will reside See Configuring DLC Records for Each Interface on page 8 46 B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Management PVCs 2 Select New or Modify to add or change DLCI and EDLCI Management PVCs When you select New the configuration option field is blank When you select Modify the values displayed for all fields are based on the PVC ID that you specified Table 8 12 Management PVC Options 1 of 4 Name Possible Settings ASCII text entry Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies a unique name for the management PVC as referenced on screens e g Tpa for Tampa Florida ASCII text entry Where you enter a unique name for the management PVC maximum length 8 characters Intf IP Address Possible Settings Node IP Address Special nnn nnn nnn nnn Default Setting Node IP Address Specifies the IP address needed to access the unit via this management PVC providing connectivity to an external IP network through the frame relay network
125. ansfering data to an NMS 10 40 transmission errors transmit bit burst analysis frame size distribution Transmit Clock Invert we transparent remote management control Trap Dial Out 8 69 Disconnect Managers Number of Traps authentificationFailure DLCI Enterprise Specific General Link Link Interfaces 8 68 linkUp and linkDown RMON RMON Specific SNMP and dial out options 8 65 standards compliance 9124 A2 GH30 00 Index warmStart Trend report troubleshooting device problems frame relay PVC problems 11 11 TruePut 1 4 TS Management Access Level access level limiting Telnet access TST LED 10 4 Type Access typical applications U UNI 3 12 8 23 8 24 unit managing unknown protocol frames upgrading system software upload download capability uploading data to an NMS user history adding files installing files monitoring DLCI statistics gathering user interface cannot be accessed communication port options external device COM port options resetting restoring access Telnet session user defined history user to network interface UNI 3 12 V V 35 connector crossover cable D 7 straight through cable Value Out of Range message variable bindings viewing LEDs Network Health charts and tables Performance Wizard graphs March 1999 IN 11 Index W warmStart e
126. ansferring Collected Data on page 10 40 Displaying System Information Use the Identity screen to view identification information about the FrameSaver unit This information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement units and or making firmware upgrades B gt Procedure To view system information 1 Access the Identity menu Main Menu gt Status gt Identity 2 Select System amp NAM to view the following information View this field To find the System Name Domain name for this SNMP managed node up to 255 ASCII characters System Contact Contact person for this SNMP managed node System Location Physical location for this SNMP managed node NAM Type Type of unit installed referred to as a network access module or NAM e g T1 FR NAM Serial Number Unit s 7 character serial number Current Software version currently being used by the unit Software Revision Format nn nn nn consists of a 6 digit number that represents the major and minor revision levels Alternate Software version that has been downloaded into the unit but Software Revision has not yet been implemented Format is the same as for the Current Software Revision In Progress indicates that the flash memory is currently being downloaded Invalid indicates that no download has occurred or the download was not successful Hardware Revision Unit s hardware version Format nnnn nnx consists of a 4 digi
127. aracters Received Number of data octets bytes received over the interface FECNs Received Number of FECNSs received over the interface The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator BECNs Received Number of BECNs received over the interface The network sends BECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator 10 30 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 10 12 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 2 of 4 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay Errors Total Errors Number of total frame relay errors excluding LMI errors Short frames long frames invalid DLCls unknown DLCls and unknown errors are included in this total Indicates that there may be a non frame relay device on the other end of the link or the units at either the far end or both ends of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid Rx Frames Number of invalid frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface There is a non frame relay device on the other end of the link Short Rx Frames Number of frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface that were less than 5 octets five 8 bit bytes in length There may be a non frame relay device on the other end of the link Long Rx Frames Number of frames received over the Network or Port
128. ary Destination Assignments Link DLCI EDLCI e Clear Assignments Management and Communication Options e Node IP e Management PVCs e General SNMP Management e Telnetand FTP Session e SNMP NMS Security e SNMP Traps e Communication Port External Modem on Com Port New or Modify PVC Connection i Entry New or Modify MAIN MENU Test PVC Entry Auto Configuration Configuration FR Discovery Auto Configuration ana MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Modem Call Directories System Information Administer Logins Change Operating Mode Select Software Release Clear Device Fail Reset Device System Information Device Name e System Name Administer Logins Select Software Release e Login ID e Current Release e Password e Alternate Release n Contact Access Level Switch amp Reset Date Time New y 99 16345b 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary A 3 Menu Hierarchy A 4 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 IP Addressing Selecting an IP Addressing Scheme 9124 A2 GH30 00 You can select from many IP addressing schemes to provide SNMP NMS connectivity When selecting a scheme keep the following in mind Because connection to remote devices is through PVCs if desired you can assign IP addresses and subnet masks to each PVC individually Assign IP addresses on a per interface or FrameSaver unit basis Although r
129. ary routing loops which will last 16 iterations times the retry count None No default network destination is specified Unrouteable data will be discarded This is the recommended setting COM Specifies that the default destination is connected to the COM port Only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 8 17 Communication Port Options PVCname Specifies a name for the management PVC Only appears when a management PVC name is defined for the node For example when the network is connected to a remote device located in Tampa Tpa can be specified as the PVC name which is the link between the local FrameSaver unit and the one located in Tampa PVCTpa would appear as one of the available selections TS Management Link Available Settings None PVCname Default Setting None Specifies a troubleshooting management link for the special needs of network service providers If the option is changed from the management PVC name to None the Delete the Management PVC PVCname and the associated DLCI Record prompt appears If you select No The link designation is removed and the option is set to None m Yes The link designation is removed and the option is set to None and the link and its DLCI will be deleted as well None Disables or does not specify a TS Management Link PVCname Specifies the name of the TS Management PVC Display Conditions This selection only appears when a dedicat
130. ation and termination of a DCLB for this frame relay link The actuate and release sequences do not need to match for example a DCLB started with a V 54 actuate sequence can be stopped with an FT1 release sequence 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 45 Configuration Configuring DLCI Records for Each Interface If Auto Configuration is not used it is necessary to create DLCI records manually for each interface If you do use Auto Configuration then it may only be necessary to create a management DLCI between the FrameSaver unit and the router attached to the data port Configure the DLCI records for the following interfaces Network Data port DLCI records for all interfaces are created and configured in the same manner Procedures for creating DLCI Records are shown in the following examples B gt Procedure To create and configure DLCI records 1 Select the desired DLCI records 2 Select New and press Enter to create a new DLCI The DLCI Records Entry screen appears for the frame relay link selected The DLCI Number field is blank while the rest of the fields are filled with the default value settings NOTE If the maximum number of DLCls have already been defined the message No more DLCIs allowed appears 3 Enter the DLCI number to be created 4 Change DLCI option settings as required i NOTE Do not multiplex a DLCI unless a NextEDGE or FrameSaver device isat both ends of the connection
131. ation is available for viewing The Network Time Slot Fields top Indicates NO1 to N24 The Network Interface time slot 01 to 24 The Cross Connect Status Field bottom Indicates FrameRlyx The time slot is assigned to Network Frame Relay Link Dss p yy The DSX 1 on slot ss port p time slot yy is assigned to the Network Interface time slot 01 to 24 Dss p yyr The DSX 1 on slot ss port p time slot yy is assigned to the Network Interface time slot 01 to 24 using Robbed Bit Signaling r FrameSaver physical slot assignment information appears below the DSX 1 interface time slot fields The following information is available for viewing Physical Slot Identifies the assigned card type 01 to 14 based on model T1 NAM T1 NAM Empty The slot is empty 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 10 23 Operation and Maintenance 10 24 Displaying DSX 1 Time Slot Assignments Use the DSX 1 Timeslot Assignments Status screen to display all of the DSO assignments for each DSO on the DSX 1 interface Use the following menu sequence to display DSX 1 channel information Main Menu gt Status gt Timeslot Assignment Status gt DSX 1 Select the desired DSX 1 slot and port The DSX 1 Timeslot Assignment Status screen displays 24 two field entries in three rows Together each two field entry defines the assignment for one DSX 1 interface time slot The top field represents the time s
132. ations Multinational Frame Relay Solution For multinational applications North American FrameSaver SLV units can be teamed with FrameSaver 9820 C and 9820 units to provide a complete end to end global frame relay management solution for international companies This solution benefits North American based companies with international locations that are used to intelligent diagnostic and service level verification features in their frame relay networks International companies can expand globally Multinational North American based companies with international locations m International companies with branches in North America The illustration below shows this application Location FR E esosooeososo rte M Frame FrameSaver Relay SLV 9124 Router Unit al North American FrameSaver Frame Siy 9128 Relay Unit Router 3 2 May 1999 Preliminary World Wide Location North American Frame Relay Network Customer E i T ad FrameSaver SLV 9820 C Relay Unit Router NTU lt 2 Ey p FrameSaver F SLV 9820 Frame Unit ely Router 99 16285 9124 A2 GH30 00 Typical Applications SLV Frame Relay Access 9124 A2 GH30 00 Typical remote monitoring RMON applications include a m FrameSaver SLV units with RMON capability at the central and remote sites using FrameSaver SLV 9124 and or 9624 units or Full NetScout RMON probes at the central sites and u
133. attached equipment Verify that the network cable is securely attached at both ends Contact network provider Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified by for the network port Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 10 6 Health and Status Messages 3 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do LMI Down frame relay The Local Management For the Network interface Interface is down for the 1 If LMI was never up verify f lay link specified frame relay lin that the proper time slots have been configured If LMI was never up verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used Verify that Frame Relay Performance Statistics show LMI frames being transmitted If all of the above have been verified and the physical link is not in Alarm contact network provider For Port n 1 Check that the DTE cable is securely attached at both ends Verify that Transmit Clock Source and Invert Transmit Clock options are properly configured Verify that Frame Relay Performance Statistics show LMI frames being received If no frames are being received Check the attached device Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used 2 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specif
134. be looped back Framer he Framer The T1 Ao Interface Interface a C A 97 15338 The T1 NAM will not respond to any messages from the network during this test CAUTION Repeater Loopback may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted A RLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Payload Loopback Send Remote Line Loopback or an active Monitor Pattern on this network interface m All loopbacks on any other T1 interface with DSOs assigned to this network interface Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this interface m Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous and assigned to this network interface May 1999 Preliminary 11 21 Troubleshooting Send Line Loopback The remote Line Loopback LLB up and down codes are in band codes that allow control of a remote device The LLB Up code invokes a line loopback in the remote unit while the LLB Down code terminates the remote line loopback Network loopbacks are defined in AT amp T TR 62411 A remote LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active Any Loopback on the same interface Send Pattern Test on this network inter
135. ber 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary C 19 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Static DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area These alarms apply to DLCls on the network interface They are created either during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created and put into the NetScout defined alarm area The thresholds for these alarms can be edited using NetScout Manager Plus so they match the values in the SLA between the customer and service provider See Editing Alarms in Chapter 6 Using NetScout Manager Plus Table D 5 Static DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area Current Latency Average Latency Frames Received Frames Sent Tx Frames Exceeding CIR Tx CIR Utilization MIB Tag OID 2 MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 7 D MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D MIB FT DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D MIB FT DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtDiciTxFrOutCIR OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D MIB FT DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Interval 900 secs 15 mins 60 secs 1 min Rising Threshold Default Must be configured Must be configured Must
136. ble with OpenLane NetScout and Concord Communications products May 1999 Preliminary 1 5 About the FrameSaver SLV The OpenLane Management Solution FrameSaver SLV units are managed by Paradyne s preeminent OpenLane network management solution for Unix or Windows based systems The OpenLane solution consists of the following applications m DCE Manager m Performance Wizard with Diagnostic Wizard OpenLane DCE Manager This application is a powerful management system that runs from an HP OpenView console and provides a real time view of network and device statuses Some of its features include m Plug and play device discovery full awareness of PVCs and database level integration into HP OpenView m Device identification and access to detailed health and status alarms tests etc information Level 1 and 2 physical and logical frame relay monitoring and diagnostics loopbacks m Enhanced SNMP trap processing to ensure that network trap icons reflect the alarm on the device Real time graphical representations of the device and all its interfaces m Device configuration m Telnet access to devices 1 6 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 About the FrameSaver SLV OpenLane Performance Wizard 9124 A2 GH30 00 OpenLane Performance Wizard is an advanced performance monitoring application that provides real time and historical data collection for determining network performance and service level ve
137. bps Possible Settings 1 1536 Default Setting 1536 software and configuration files to be downloaded using selected bandwidth without interfering with normal operation Using this option new software and configuration files can be downloaded quickly using the default settings or at a slower rate over an extended period of time by selecting a slower speed Based upon TCP flow control the FTP server in the system throttles bandwidth to match this setting Sets the maximum receive rate of file transfer to the system This option allows new 1 1536 Sets the download line speed from 1 kilobits per second to the full network line speed May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Configuring SNMP NMS Security Select SNMP NMS Security to display add or change the SNMP security configuration options for the FrameSaver unit A table is displayed consisting of the network management systems identified by IP address that are allowed to access the FrameSaver unit by SNMP Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP NMS Security See Table 8 15 for SNMP NMS Security configuration options Table 8 15 SNMP NMS Security Options 1 of 2 NMS IP Validation Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether security checks are performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the node Only allows access when t
138. cial TS Management Link access see page 9 5 To limit Telnet access via a service provider s troubleshooting management link follow the procedure on page 9 5 B gt Procedure To limit Telnet access when the session is not on the TS Management Link i 1 Go to the Telnet and FTP Session Options screen Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable Telnet access Telnet Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login on page 9 11 Assign an access level Session Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user Cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the Telnet session e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 telnet access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 3 Save your changes 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 9 3 Security and Logins See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for more information about communication port configuration options Limiting FTP Access The FrameSaver unit provides the following methods for limiti
139. cifies whether frames packets sent on a management PVC have the Discard Eligible DE bit set This bit is used by the network to prioritize which frames to discard first during periods of network congestion This allows management traffic to be viewed as lower priority than customer data Enable Sets the DE bit to one on all frames sent on the management PVC Disable Sets the DE bit to zero on all frames sent on the management PVC This is the recommended setting particularly for NSPs providing a managed network service Primary Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Port 1 Clear Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC The interface selected must have at least one DLCI or DLCI with EDLCI defined which is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC Net1 FR1 Specifies the network interface as the source link for the connection Port 1 Specifies the frame relay link on Port 1 as the destination link for the connection Clear Clears the link and the DLCI field and suppresses the EDLCI field if the DLCI was multiplexed May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 12 Management PVC Options 3 of 4 Primary DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the DLC number used for the management PVC after the frame relay interface
140. ck is active on the data frame relay link port or a T1 frame relay link DTE External LB Active Port 1 An external DTE Loopback is running on the specified port DTE Init Ext LB Active Port 1 DTE has initiated an external DTE Loopback on the specified port FCC Test Active Should never see this message Lamp Test Active The Lamp Test is active causing the LEDs on the faceplate to flash on and off Monitor Pttn Active DLCI nnnn FrameSaver unit is monitoring a test pattern on the frame_relay_link 1 2 specified DLCI on the specified frame relay link Monitor Pttn Active interface FrameSaver unit is monitoring the selected test pattern on the specified interface LLB Active DSX 1 A Line Loopback LLB test is active on the LLB Active Network specified network interface PLB Active DSX 1 A Payload Loopback PLB test is active on the PLB Active Network specified network interface 10 18 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 10 7 Test Status Messages 2 of 2 Message What It Indicates DTPLB Active Slot 1 Port 1 A Data Terminal Payload Loopback DTPLB is active for the specified slot and port This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay RLB Active DSX 1 fj A Repeater Loopback RLB test is active on the DSX 1 interface No Test Active No tests are currently running PVC Loopback Active DLCI nnnn FrameSaver uni
141. condary Clock Source options only Internal can be selected for both options All other selections must have different settings e g if Primary Clock Source is set to Net1 Secondary Clock Source cannot be set to Net1 Net1 The secondary clock is derived from the Network1 T1 interface DSX The secondary clock is derived from the DSX T1 interface This setting only appears if the DSX 1 interface is installed and enabled see Configuring the DSX 1 Interface Physical Options page 8 32 Internal The secondary clock is the internal clock May 1999 Preliminary 8 27 Configuration Setting Up Each Physical Interface Configure physical characteristics using the following interface options 11 Network Physical Options below m DSX 1 Interface Physical Options on page 8 32 Data Port Physical Options on page 8 34 Configuring the FrameSaver T1 Network Interface Physical Options 8 28 Select Physical to display or change the physical configuration options for the T1 Network interface see Table 8 4 following this menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Network Physical Table 8 4 T1 Network Physical Options 1 of 4 Interface Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the interface selected in the Network field is available for use Enable The interface is available Disable The interface is not available for use When the in
142. configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login on page 9 11 Limit the effective access level to Port Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 Level 3 or Level 2 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user Cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the port e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 port access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow Level 1 users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 NOTE See Resetting the FrameSaver Unit in Chapter 10 Operation and Maintenance should you inadvertently be locked out 3 Save your changes 9 2 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Security and Logins Controlling Telnet or FTP Access The FrameSaver unit provides several methods for limiting access via a Telnet or FTP session Telnet or FTP access can be on a standard management link or it can be on a service provider s troubleshooting TS management link Limiting Telnet Access Methods for limiting access through a Telnet session include the following i m Disabling Telnet access completely Requiring a user ID or password to login for Telnet Sessions not on the TS Management Link Assigning an access level for Telnet sessions Disabling spe
143. cover their elements E ements are resources that can be polled e g LAN WAN interfaces frame relay circuits routers and servers The two types of elements that can be polled are Statistics elements Provide counters and other gauges for information gathered about your network for statistical and trend analysis Conversation elements Provide RMON2 and similar data for information gathered about network traffic between nodes B gt Procedure To find SLV unit elements in your network 1 Select the LAN WAN radio button to specify the element type to be found Network Health treats frame relay element discovery as a WAN element type 2 Enter the IP Addresses of the SLV units to be located and the Community String Community Name in the unit The Community String is case sensitive 3 Select the Discover button The Discover dialog box closes and the Discovering dialog box opens showing the results of the discovery process A message indicates the number of elements discovered and the number of existing elements updated when the discovery process Is complete Depending upon the number of units entered it could take anywhere from a few minutes to an hour or longer depending upon the size of your network to discover all elements in the network See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information and how to schedule automatic element discovery updates to the database 9124 A2 G
144. cross connected T1 E amp M busy interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an E amp M interface ABCD 1111 FXOg idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 FXSg idle interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXO Ground Start interface ABCD 1111 FXOg busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 FXSg busy interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXO Ground Start interface ABCD 0101 FXOl idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 FXSl idle interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXO Loop Start interface ABCD 0101 FXOl busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 FXSI busy interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXO Loop Start interface ABCD 0101 FXSg idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 FXOg idle interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXS Ground Start interface ABCD 0101 FXSg busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 FXOg busy interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXS Ground Start interface ABCD 1111 FXSl idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 FXOl idle interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXS Loop Start interface ABCD 0101 FXSIl busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 FXOl busy interface during a CGA represen
145. cross connected to other ports to determine which time slots are being used by the network for frame relay traffic These time slots are set to FrameRly1 This is the factory default When disabled you must make time slot assignments manually 4 If Time Slot Discovery is disabled assign Network time slots for use by Frame Relay service link 1 by typing FrameRly1 in the selected Network field 5 Repeat Step 4 until all desired time slots are assigned 6 To save changes select Save and press Return or press ESC to return to the Time Slot Assignment menu Assigning DSX 1 Time Slots to the Network Interface 9124 A2 GH30 00 DSX 1 time slots are assigned by channel allocation where you specify individual time slots The DSX 1 interface must be enabled to assign DSX 1 time slots to the Network interface see Table 8 5 DSX 1 Physical Options Value Meaning Nxx The upper field represents time slot xx of the selected Network interface Assigned The time slot is already assigned to something other than a DSX 1 time slot so it is unavailable Assigned time slots cannot be modified from this screen Available The time slot is currently unassigned Time slot yy of DSX 1 interface p in slot s is assigned to the Network time slot identified right above it Nxx May 1999 Preliminary 8 37 Configuration Time Slot Assignment Rules Valid Network time slots are either labeled as Available or contain a DSX 1 time sl
146. ctions This chapter provides additional information about the FrameSaver unit s features and a detailed description of the all the configuration options available Setting Up the Unit on page 8 4 Considerations When Setting Up on page 8 4 Selecting a Management Interface on page 8 4 Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units on page 8 5 Basic Configuration on page 8 6 Configuration Option Areas on page 8 6 Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options on page 8 8 Changing Configuration Options on page 8 8 Saving Configuration Options on page 8 9 m Setting Up Auto Configuration on page 8 10 Setting Up for Trap Dial Out on page 8 17 Entering Modem Directory Phone Numbers on page 8 17 Setting Up Management on page 8 18 m Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP on page 8 19 m Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity on page 8 20 Setting Up for Back to Back Operation on page 8 21 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 1 Configuration m Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections on page 8 36 Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface on page 8 36 Assigning DSX 1 Time Slots to the Network Interface on page 8 37 DSxX 1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning on page 8 39 Configuring the System on page 8 22 The following configuration option tables are included in this chapter Table 8 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options on page 8
147. cuts e g enter 56 k for 56 kilobits per second or 16 m for 16 Mbits per second 7 4 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Concord s Network Health Apply your changes Select the Apply Next button to save your change and bring up the next element to be edited Continue until all newly discovered frame relay elements have been modified before selecting the OK button Select the the OK button The Modify Element dialog box closes Select the OK button at the bottom of the Poller Configuration window The modified elements are saved to the database and the units are polled Allow Network Health to continue polling for about a half an hour to allow time for data to be gathered before running any reports Grouping Elements for Reports Once the discovery process is completed and required changes are made the newly discovered elements DLCls should be organized into a group for Health reporting Grouping makes for easier monitoring and management of similar node types e g all SLV elements Once grouped you can then run reports on all DLCls in the network as well as reports on individual DLCls B gt Procedure To group elements 1 From the console select Edit Groups from the Reports menu The Add Groups dialog box opens Enter a name in the Group Name field Up to 64 characters can be entered A through Z a through z 0 through 9 dashes periods and underscores _ can be used No spaces can b
148. deleting a login delivery PVC enaysi 52 success 5 24 Destination 8 67 Default IP Link determining test status results 11 16 Device Explorer historical data collection Fail messages troubleshooting problems Diagnostic Wizard setting test timeout 11 14 Dial In Access Dial Out Delay Time Min precion ET options Trap 8 69 Directory Alternate Dial Out entering phone numbers 217 disabling SNMP access 9 6 disaster recovery Discard Eligible DE Disconnect Time Minutes 8 73 discovering elements DLCls Discovery frame relay FR 8 11 displaying configuration options identity information LEDs DLCI 8 58 configuring a management congestion dedicated for management Destination Down 10 14 11 5 elements summary report interface status 10 20 monitoring user history Number 9124 A2 GH30 00 Index Priority Records Source statistics status 10 20 Traps on Interfaces Type domains and groups correcting verifying download capability downloading determining when completed 10 39 MIBs and SNMP traps SLV aans ea software user history file DS1 physical link diagnostics integrity DSU Loopback DSX 1 adapter pin sssionments 10 assigning timeslots connector pin assignments interface LEDs setting ie signaling assignments timeslot assignments 10 24 trunk conditioning DT
149. devFrExtLinkTxDiscards OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 14 1 MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLink TotRxErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 Interval 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins These alarms apply to the NextEDGE unit s frame relay interfaces They are created during RMON initialization Rising Falling Threshold Threshold Default Default 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link C 16 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table D 2 Static Frame Relay Interface Alarm Defaults 2 of 2 Rising Falling Event Threshold Threshold MIB Tag OID Interval Type Default Default Rx Overruns MIB devfrext mib E 900 secs Rising Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 28 1 Tx Underruns MIB devfrext mib E 900 secs Rising Tag devErExtLinkTx eS Underruns OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 29 1 Rx Nonoctet Aligns MIB devfrext mib E 900 secs Rising Tag devFrExtLinkRx es NonOctet OID
150. directions The radio buttons refer to the input and output of the device Link Status next to each device indicate the link s current status Each device is identified using a connection name DLCI name and DLCI number The Throughput graphs for each device shows the input and or output for each device Lines are shown for CIR physical link speed and input and output in bits per second May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Using the OpenLane NMS Variables that could appear in the panes below each graph include Variable Displayed Indication Frames Sent above CIR Number of transmitted frames that exceeded the contracted CIR Frames Sent within CIR Number of transmitted frames that complied with CIR Frames Sent marked DE Transmit data on a management PVC is marked discard eligible so the network can discard the lower priority frame when there is congestion Frames discarded by the network Number of transmitted frames that were dropped Bytes Sent above CIR Number of transmitted bytes over the contracted CIR Bytes Sent within CIR Number of transmitted bytes within or under the contracted CIR Bytes discarded by the network Number of transmitted bytes actually lost BECNs Received Backward explicit congestion notification BECN has been sent by the network warning that outbound frames may encounter congestion and may be dropped BECNs seconds Duration over which BECNs were received FECNs
151. display will include the selected interval plus interval or time the 3 intervals recorded before it and the 3 intervals recorded after it Occurring on and after a Line 16 The display will include the selected interval plus selected interval or time the 6 intervals recorded after it May 1999 Preliminary 10 33 Operation and Maintenance 10 34 Line 10 Line 13 ESF Line Performance Statistics Screen Example main status performance esf Device Name Near 123 Current 01 Far Time 10 37 10 35 02 03 04 05 06 07 10 20 10 05 09 50 09 35 09 20 09 05 Worst Interval Near Tot valid 96 00010 00000 Far Tot valid 96 00010 00000 Ctrl a to access these functions Refresh PgDn Select 01 02 Node A Network 1 ESF LINE PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Current Interval Timer 124 ES Near Far 0 oOoo0oo0oo0o0oo0o0oO oo0oo0o0o0oo0oo0oO 24 24 14 14 03 04 05 06 07 08 oo0oo0oo0o0oo0o0oO0O 14 14 00000 00000 ESC for previous menu PgUp ClrFarStats ClrNearStats 09 cai oo0oo0oo0oo 0oo o0 o 0oo 0 CSS Near Far 0 oOoo0oo0o0o0oo0o0o0O PARADYNE 9128 01 26 1998 23 32 ESF Error Events Near 15 Far 12 LOFC Near Far 0 oOoo0oo0o0o0oo0o0o0O MainMenu For the ESF line performance statistics the following metrics are kept for each 15 minute interval over the past 24 hour period A Near set and a Far set are kept for each m
152. e DEE n aii ia 1 28 LT Ae eet E en i A 3 S10 ey PSS eee Male bkm OTE Ta uT Re ea E e i i P a ee i FLD ie E ae ee L rL r Pn oe ee T i eee oe pire ep OA LB rehi AA 1 E ba LELTE ETLE AE a n BJELLE EA eee EE L HLE Lee i s s Fe SS MHF RA CS irio rrm n Cee i yj a ee re oe fai Syge H jn E bp a Saag 7 13 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Concord s Network Health Executive Service Level Report This report summarizes service level performance for an enterprise on a single page Use this report to assess whether IT service levels are meeting availability and service goals E 2 F E E LLP ia PLE Lj ELF mL Litr FHA Ie Fil pre Ch tal g Lee DE G ot oe iiem hj P Eem Hij iier be m ibt a Latte te L aza biune m LETE L rae pre E PA pe F mL EHT kii hoe E pae Tis Ti Lil ns Te pi jisti mj I s pe TL P Gl lakim Dhiri far All ri Th Sie Hi ce aac oe Pe ita PS 1h ered E Te fac a Ly ibti SS Ari athe Par E F al bnti fihi DREL me kk FAFE DLT Ei Muk aj a n i a ET Le Ein mkir bos En bhai CPA Lis LA py PLATS CEA Eia Ee LEFI EET Eeli citi Ar a pa Pee ee Arpi SA GL Hoiewith Dirien dar All Goon LiT ee a i a cardi j iB ad Amm TRTE TA E a oe od ER h EHTA I Lhi i
153. e 1 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP Get and Set commands Community Name 2 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the second of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text entry Adds to or changes Community Name 2 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 2 May 1999 Preliminary 8 61 Configuration Table 8 13 General SNMP Management Options 2 of 2 Name 2 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 2 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP Get and Set commands Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support 8 62 Select Telnet and FTP Session to enable or disable a Telnet or download session Telnet configuration options control whether a Telnet session is allowed through an i
154. e Settings CIR Other Default Setting CIR Specifies the committed amount of transmitted data in bits that the network will accept without discarding frames Bc CIR Specifies the CIR amount of data that will be accepted before frames are discarded Other Allows you to specify a rate other than the CIR in the Port Rate Bc field In this case Ic is calculated according to 1 370 May 1999 Preliminary 8 49 Configuration 8 50 Table 8 9 DLCI Record Options 2 of 2 Possible Settings 0 maximum line rate on port Default Setting CIR rate Allows you to display or change the committed burst size for the DLCI Display Conditions This option only appears when Committed Burst Size is set to Other Excess Burst Size Bits Specifies the maximum amount of data in bits that the network may accept beyond the CIR without discarding frames Be Possible Settings 0 maximum line rate on port Default Setting maximum port rate minus the default CIR Allows you to display or change the excess burst size for the DLCI DLCI Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting High i Specifies the relative priority for data received on the DLCI from an attached device also known as quality of service All data on Port 1 is cut through as long as there is no higher priority data queued from another user port The DLCI priority set for an interface appli
155. e a hyperlink to additional information Click on the highlighted text e g clicking on Performance Statistics in Chapter 10 takes you directly to the Performance Statistics section in Chapter 10 Operation and Maintenance 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary xiii About This Guide Product Related Documents Document Number Document Title Paradyne FrameSaver Documentation 9124 A2 GN10 FrameSaver SLV 9124 Installation Instructions 9124 A2 GL10 FrameSaver SLV 9124 Quick Reference Paradyne OpenLane NMS Documentation 7700 A2 GB23 OpenLane DCE Manager for HP OpenView for Windows User s Guide 7800 A2 GB26 OpenLane DCE Manager User s Guide 7800 A2 GB28 OpenLane Performance Wizard User s Guide NetScout Documentation 2930 170 NetScout Probe User Guide 2930 610 NetScout Manager Plus User Guide 2930 620 NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide 2930 788 NetScout Manager Plus Set Up amp Installation Guide Concord Communications Documentation 09 10010 005 Network Health User Guide 09 10020 005 Network Health Installation Guide 09 10050 002 Network Health Traffic Accountant Reports Guide 09 10070 001 Network Health Reports Guide Contact your sales or service representative to order product documentation Complete Paradyne documentation for this product is available at www paradyne com Select Library Technical Manuals FrameSaver Frame Relay Devices To request a paper copy of
156. e distribution Frame Relay assigning timeslots ef Discovery DSOs Base Rate options eat troubleshooting PVC problems 11 11 frames setting the range 5 8 Par file transfers initiating a session limiting access Login Required Max Receive Rate kbps Session function keys G General LEDs options 8 26 SNMP management options Traps generating reports 7 6 glossary graphs Performance Wizard 5 10 grouping elements for reports 7 5 March 1999 9124 A2 GH30 00 H hardware requirements hardware revision NAM HDLC errors frame relay statistics Health and Status messages heaviest users output eee tes highlighted text hyperlink to more information history adding files installing files monitoring DLCI hyperlink to more information highlighted text I Identity displaying Ignore Control Leads Inactivity Timeout installation and setup DCE Manager Network Health 7 2 Performance Wizard SLM Reports installing NetScout Manager Plus and graphs Network Health Performance Wizard 5 3 user history files interface menu driven user Interface Status Network Internal Transmit Clock Inverse ARP Invert Transmit Clock invitation to send us your comments A IP connectivity 1 3 node information Ping test 11 25 Validation NMS IP Address NMS number Node 8 53 IP addressing assigning addr
157. e downloaded software With this feature you control when the upgrade software is implemented B gt Procedure To switch to the new software 1 Goto the Control menu and select Select Software Release Main Menu Control Select Software Release The Select Software Release screen shows the currently loaded software version and the new release that was just transferred If the download failed Invalid appears in the Alternate Release field instead of the new release number Repeat the procedure on page 10 38 Upgrading System Software if this occurs 2 Select Switch amp Reset The Are you sure prompt appears 3 Enter Yes The unit resets and begins installing the newly transferred software 4 Verify that the new software release was successfully installed as the Current Software Revision Main Menu gt Status gt Identity NOTE lf someone opens a Telnet session and accesses the units Identity identification screen while the unit is downloading software the In Progress message appears in the Alternate Software Revision field See Displaying System Information on page 10 2 to see what is included in the unit s Identity screen 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 10 39 Operation and Maintenance Transferring Collected Data SLV user history statistics and LMI packet capture data can be uploaded to an NMS or a Network Associates Sniffer using FTP which is faster than other methods The rate at
158. e included and the word All cannot be used Select the WAN radio button above the Available Elements list Highlight all the DLCIs listed on the Available Elements list or select specific DLCls then select the left arrow button The highlighted DLCIs move from the Available Elements list to the Group Members list Select the OK button when all appropriate DLCIs have been moved to the Group Members list The Add Groups dialog box closes and the newly created group appears on the Groups dialog box See Managing Groups and Group Lists in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information It also tells you how to customize reports 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 7 5 Concord s Network Health Generating Reports for a Group Once Network Health has had sufficient time to gather data from the polled DLCls and the DLCls have been grouped you can start generating reports The following are defined when specifying a report Report to be run Group Daily a specific day s of the week weekly or monthly report Destination of the report NOTE Not all reports can be ordered or scheduled on a monthly basis See the Network Health Reports Guide to determine what reports can be generated on a monthly basis B gt Procedure To run a Health report 1 a pi e N From the console select Run from the Reports menu then Health Reports The Run Health Report dialog box opens In the Report section se
159. e planned m Service level reporting for network performance as well as specific failures real time as well as network wide reporting Intelligent service level verification that accurately analyzes instantaneous burst and dropped packets not averages and verifies SLAs service level agreements Plus RMON based remote monitoring based performance monitoring for network optimization and planning m Advanced frame relay diagnostic and management tools for maximum network availability The FrameSaver SLV unit s unique PVC multiplexing capability referred to as embedded DLCls EDLCls reduces the number of frame relay ports required and permits multiple data streams to share a single PVC Used in conjunction with the OpenLane and NetScout Manager Plus NMS applications the system provides a unique solution for measuring network performance that is proactive and integrated and is applicable to both end user and service provider frame relay management needs For service providers implementing this solution differentiates services provided while reducing deployment and maintenance costs In addition fewer provisioning and security problems will occur since extra DLCls do not have to be configured for management data and the data does not have to go through a customer s router 1 2 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 About the FrameSaver SLV FrameSaver SLV Features 9124 A2 GH30 00 The FrameSaver SLV product is a s
160. e procedure below describes how to monitor an agent s traffic The procedure is the same for protocol monitoring but you may be prompted to select a Domain Group as well as an agent or DLCI B gt Procedure 1 Select the Traffic radio button to monitor the newly added agent or one of its DLCls 2 Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCls appear in the DLCI list box under the agent list box 3 If you want to monitor one of the agents DLCls highlight the DLCI to be monitored 4 Click on an applicable icon The selected graphical report should open Traffic icons that would be of particular interest are Traffic Monitor and Domain History In the example below the Domain History icon was selected which is actually a real time report NetScout RMON History Grenada43 File View Format Refresh Applications NetScout RMON History Grenada43 Utilization 11 17 02 11 28 06 11 34 15 11 40 24 Mon Sep 14 May 1999 Preliminary 6 19 Using NetScout Manager Plus NOTE If Size Distribution is the selected View and distribution size has been changed via OpenLane Performance Wizard the values shown for the distribution will not be accurate Only default size distributions are tracked Statistical Windows Supported Not all icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window are supported for FrameSaver units For example All Convs conversations and TopNConv icons appear when the Protocol radio but
161. e provider Verify the LMI Reported DLCI field on the Interface Status screen DTE is configured Check the DTE s configuration incorrectly LMI is not configured Configure LMI characteristics to a properly for the DTE or match those of the DTE or network network LMI is not configured properly for the DTE network or ISDN link LMI link is inactive Verify that the LMI link is active on the network the Status Msg Received counter on the Network Frame Relay Performance Statistics screen increments Losing Data Frame relay network is Run PVC Loopback and Pattern experiencing problems tests to isolate the problem then contact the service provider Out of Sync If Monitor Pattern was Verify that the unit at the selected it means the test other end is configured to pattern generator and Send Pattern receiver have not yet Correct unit configurations synchronized Check the line s error rate If the message persists it the physical line quality means that 5 packets out of i 25 are missing or are out of Contact the service provider sequence May 1999 Preliminary 11 11 Troubleshooting Tests Available 11 12 The Test menu allows you to run loopbacks and test patterns on the FrameSaver unit and to test the front panel LEDs It is available to users with a security access level of 1 or 2 To run the following tests See PVC Tests Network PVC Tests m PVC Loopback page 11 17
162. e router is to route data so a route has been configured within the FrameSaver unit Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps Or for a local DLCI between the central site FrameSaver unit and its router verify that a Default IP Destination route has been configured Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Node IP Default IP Destination Configure both SNMP Traps and a Default IP Destination when PVC Multiplexing is used as when using the Auto Configuration feature 4 Select the IP Ping test Main Menu gt Test gt IP Ping 5 Enter the IP Address of the central site NMS then select Start 6 Verify the results of the IP Ping test While the test is running In Progress is displayed in the Status field When the test is finished Alive Latency nn ms should appear as the Status nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds If any other message is displayed additional testing will be required May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting Lamp Test The FrameSaver unit supports a Lamp Test to verify that all LEDs are lighting and functioning properly All LEDs flash or blink on and off at the same time every 1 2 second during execution of the test When the test is stopped the LEDs are restored to their normal condition If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled and a Test Duration is set the La
163. e troubleshooting and performance monitoring All devices must first be added to the OpenLane Device Explorer database Web Browsers Supported Users interact with the system via a Web browser The following are recommended Netscape Communicator 4 04 or higher Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 The SLM Reports have been tested with the Apache Web server although other Web servers may work as well including Web servers that use Secure Socket Layer SSL for data encryption Be aware that encryption greatly slows the throughput of the system If the Apache Web server is not installed refer to the Apache Web site at http Awww apache org for installation instructions 5 26 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Using the OpenLane NMS Installation and Setup of SLM Reports Refer to the OpenLane Performance Wizard User s Guide for installation and operation instructions for the Performance Wizard and follow the instructions applicable to your network platform All of these reports can be seen online as well as provided on printed reports Displaying the Log in Screen The SLM Reports package is available for both network administrators and customers via the Web You define the URL to access the SLM Reports based on where you have located the SLM server directories e g x OpenLane index html Upon entering the URL of the server a login screen appears The following screens differ depending on whether you are Administe
164. ecord information see Table 8 9 DLC Record Options Then setup configuration is Network DLCI Records DLCI Number is automatically created from the LMI status response message DLCI Type is set to Multiplexed CIR bps is automatically determined from LMI status update message if switch provides this information Otherwise the port rate is configured Committed Burst Size Bc Bits is set to the network DLCI s CIR Excess Burst Size Be Bits is set to the network port rate minus the network DLCI s CIR DLCI Priority is set to High No PVC connections are made within the FrameSaver unit The user must manually create port and management DLCls then connect them to the DLCls discovered on the network interface 3 When non FrameSaver units are at the other end of the PVC connection change the network DLCI Type setting to Standard before sending data Setting Up for Trap Dial Out An internal modem can be attached to the COM port for dialing out when an SNMP trap is generated To set up an external modem you need to 1 Setup SNMP trap managers see page 8 65 2 Set up Modem Directory phone numbers see page 8 17 3 Configure trap dial out see page 8 66 8 16 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Entering Modem Directory Phone Numbers Phone numbers must be entered into the directories before the modem can dial out B gt Procedure
165. ecurity configuration options May 1999 Preliminary 9 9 Security and Logins Controlling External COM Port Device Access The FrameSaver unit allows you to control whether dial in access for an external device modem is allowed on the communication port Use the External Device Options screen to set the necessary configuration options to allow dial in access through the COM port B gt Procedure To control dial in access 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration User Interface gt External Modem on Com Port The External Modem Options screen appears 2 Enable the Dial In Access configuration option This option only appears when the External Device Commands option is set to AT or Other 3 Save your changes See Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Device in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for more information about external device communication port configuration options To Set the configuration option Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login on page 9 11 Limit the effective access level to Port Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 Level 3 or Level 2 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user Cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the port e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 port access has been set the Level 1 user
166. ed Management PVC has been defined on the network frame relay link as a DLCI with DLCI Type set to Standard May 1999 Preliminary 8 55 Configuration Table 8 11 Node IP Options 3 of 3 TS Management Link Access Level Available Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest access level allowed when accessing the unit via a Telnet or FTP session when the service provider is using the TS Management Link Display Conditions This option does not appear when TS Management Link is set to None NOTES Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are not affected by the access level set by the Session Access Level Login Required or FTP Login Required option settings see Table 8 14 Telnet and FTP Sessions on page 8 62 Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are affected by the Telnet Session Inactivity Timeout Disconnect Time and FTP Session option settings Level 1 Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed Use this setting when downloading files Level 2 Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information only they c
167. eee eee eee eee Time Slot Assignment Status 0 0 0 cece cece cece e eee m Performance Statistics 0 0 c cece cence eee eee Clearing Performance Statistics 0 0 ccc cece eee eee eee Service Level Verification Performance Statistics DLCI Performance Statistics 0 00 00 00 ccc e eee e eee ee Frame Relay Performance Statistics 0c0ceee eee eee ESF Line Performance Statistics 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee m FIP File Transfers 000 ccc ccc cece niuer eee enerne rrr Upgrading System Software 0 0 c cece eee eee Determining Whether a Download Is Completed Changing SOMWALC 5 sees cgees spese gurine eee ene een i Transferring Collected Data to an NMS 0 cece eee ee vi May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Contents 11 Troubleshooting Problem INdICatOIS ano eee eens oeedseeechiunge teed ieeederuss as 11 2 Resetting the Unit 0 0 ccc eens 11 3 Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu 05 11 3 Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power 0005 11 3 Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit 11 4 PUAWING 24c206up faauees ane deenueeeee aa ae een neoseeeee seeoneneed ss 11 5 Troubleshooting Tables 00 0 ccc cece eens 11 9 Device Problems 0 0 0 cc eee eee eee 11 9 Frame Relay PVC Problems 0 000 c cece eee eens 11 11 Tests Available 0 00 0
168. een Work Areas Use Ctrl a to switch between screen areas see page 4 5 B gt Procedure To switch to the function keys area 1 Press Ctrl a to switch from the screen area to the function keys area 2 Select either the function s designated underlined character or Tab to the desired function key 3 Press Return The function is performed To return to the screen area press Ctrl a again 4 8 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 User Interface and Basic Operation Selecting a Field Once you reach the desired menu or screen select a field to view or change or issue a command Press the Tab or right arrow key to move the cursor from one field to another The current setting or value appears to the right of the field Entering Information You can enter information in one of three ways Select the field then Manually type in enter the field value or command Example Entering bjk as a user s Login ID on the Administer Logins screen from the Control menu branch Type in enter the first letter s of a field value or command using the unit s character matching feature Example When configuring a port s physical characteristics with the Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks configuration option field selected possible settings include Disable Local DIPLB DCLB and Both entering d or D displays the first value starting with d Disable In this example entering dt or DT would display DTPLB as
169. een changed via the async user interface or an SNMP Manager from devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib String Device configuration change An internal device failure was detected String Device fail with error code XXXXXXXX 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table C 6 enterprise Specific Variable Bindings 2 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause devFrExtDicilflndex DLCI Status is set to Inactive the devFrExt mib DLCI is down m devFrExtDiciDici Strings devFrExt mib ifString down Due to LMI or physical failure enterpriseDLCI Down 11 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus ifString administratively mib shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown enterpriseDLCIUp 12 DLCI Status is set to Active DLCI is up again devLastTrapString Operating software has detected devHealthAndStatus that the primary clock source has mib failed String Primary clock failed enterprisePrimary ClockFail 1 enterprisePrimary ClockFailClear 101 Operating software has detected that the primary clock source is now operational again String Primary clock restored enterpriseRMON ResetToDefault 13 devLastTrapString Default Factory Configuration devHealthAndStatus settings have been reloaded mib returning RMON related options to their
170. efer to the appropriate table in the following sections for possible solutions Device Problems Table 11 2 Device Problems 1 of 2 Symptom Possible Cause Solutions No power or the LEDs The power cord is not Check that the power cord is are not lit securely plugged into the securely attached at both ends wall receptacle to rear panel connection The wall receptacle has no Check the wall receptacle power power by plugging in some equipment that is Known to be working Check the circuit breaker Verify that your site is not on an energy management program Power Up Self Test fails Only Alarm LED is on after power up The unit has detected an Reset the unit and try again internal hardware failure Contact your service representative Return the unit to the factory refer to Warranty Sales Service and Training Information on page A of this document Cannot access the Login or password is Reset the unit see unit or the incorrect COM port is Restoring Communication menu driven user misconfigured or the unit is with a Misconfigured Unit on interface otherwise configured so it page 11 4 prevents access Contact your service representative 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 11 9 Troubleshooting Table 11 2 Device Problems 2 of 2 Symptom Possible Cause Solutions Device Fail appears The unit detects an internal Record the 8 digit code from on the System and hardware failure the
171. efore Deploying Remote Units Entering and Displaying System Information SSM UP LOINS y oo 0 ara end ogg 4 on Grr ote cup I E ERE AE ee eg tT m Basic Configuration lt 2 2 d2c50ccebueges anc atesnebedaswedgeckewadhe Configuration Option Areas 0 0 cee ees Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options Changing Configuration Options 0 00 cee eee eee Saving Configuration Options 0 0 0 ce eee m Setting Up Auto Configuration 0 0 ccc ee eee Changing the Frame Relay Discovery Mode m Setting Up for Trap Dial Out 0 0 0 ccc eee Entering Modem Directory Phone Numbers 55 Setting Up Management 0 ccc eee eens Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP 0 2 0 0 cee Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity 0 0 0 cece e eens Setting Up for Back to Back Operation 0 0 00 cee eee eens Changing Operating Mode 00 cece eee eens Configuring the System 0 cece eee nes m Configuring System Options 662 4 ssrien vera ove an eo eenws eae eee ees Configuring System Frame Relay and LMI Options Configuring Service Level Verification Options Configuring General System Options 0 0 0 0 cece eee m Setting Up Each Physical Interface 0 0 c cee ee Configuring the FrameSaver T1 Network Interface Phy
172. elect General SNMP Management to add change or delete the information needed to allow the FrameSaver unit to be managed as an SNMP agent by the NMS supporting the SNMP protocols Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management See Table 8 13 for General SNMP Management configuration options Table 8 13 General SNMP Management Options 1 of 2 SNMP Management Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit can be managed as an SNMP agent by an SNMP compatible NMS Enable Can be managed as an SNMP agent Disable Cannot be managed as an SNMP agent The FrameSaver unit will not respond to SNMP messages nor send SNMP traps Community Name 1 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Public in ASCII text field Specifies the first of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text entry Adds to or changes Community Name 1 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 1 Name 1 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Nam
173. elnet Access 0 cece eee eee nena 9 3 PUI MP INC COSS ao cae ag ate we haku Son eer et are Bee eee oe 9 4 Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link 9 5 Controlling SNMP ACCESS 006 ccc cece cece cence eee eee e es Disabling SNMP Access 0000000ceeeee eee ee eee eeeeees Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels 9 7 Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses 0 00 9 8 m Controlling External COM Port Device Access 0000 0s 9 10 m Creating a LOGIN a2 ci ce4 os nec encea oa dan uheGseeessenas eee seen ceed 9 11 m Modifying a Login 00 c renerne araneae er E Deleinga Login sserrersirerriririuke E EE E ERE catarnetaeyesseuess 10 Operation and Maintenance Displaying System Information anaa nananana nanana 10 2 Viewing LEDs and Control Leads 0 cece eee 10 3 LED Descriptions wa axe a a 156 20 w eee awe actin aoe dee Att ave die ya dee Add 10 4 Device Messages ccc ct eect e teen ee ee nena 10 6 Ola WS MIOMMANON 2420 00 necdgads ss sq suerdes accysnsauiadestacess 10 11 System and Test Status Messages 00 c cece neces Self Test Results Messages 0 000 e eee e eens Health and Status Messages 0 0 0 c cece cece cece eens Test Status Messages 0 ccc cece eee eee eee e eens Network LMI Reported DLCls Status 0 ccc cece ees PVC Connection Status 0 0 cc cece cece ee
174. emory supports up to 120 remote sites the standard FrameSaver 9124 supports up to 64 remote sites In typical applications a circuit multiplexed PVC is expected from each remote unit containing a PVC from the data port plus a PVC for management Atremote sites two DLCls from each FrameSaver unit are aggregated onto one PVC going through the frame relay network to the central site Each unit s multiplexed PVC contains one DLCI from its data port and one DLCI for management Frame FrameSaver Relay FT1 Customer Network Network NMS Central alle FrameSaver 9624 Frame L ae _ Relay Relay FrameSaver Router 9124 Unit FR Frame Relay Physical Connection PVC Connection 98 15871 This PVC multiplexing is a patented method that provides the ability to multiplex frame relay frames coming from multiple DLCls onto a single DLCI sharing a single PVC connection 3 8 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Typical Applications Mixing 912x and 962x FrameSaver Units at Remote Sites NetScout 9124 A2 GH30 00 Central Port 1 Router Site FrameSaver 9620 Access SF l L 5 Frame Rela Relay FrameSaver FR B y Router 9124 ly FrameSaver nome Unit pyGs 9624 Unit 56K DDS DSX 1 Frame Frame Relay Relay FR Frame Relay Network Router PVC Connection Not all remote sites need to be equipped the same For example there can be all FrameSaver 9624 units at the remote sites or there can be
175. en either T1 or Frame Relay on Network Port was the selected interface Using this graph combination you can assess the amount of time the T1 link was free of problems or not and the types of errors the link was experiencing Mis Yes len hurry te E Link che boa Are facade Erma pacari lt e a a H ra oe Traa uran has Errai ai HALE HE ri be o DS r y ae oe 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 5 17 Using the OpenLane NMS PVC Throughput 5 18 Correlate the time at which a problem occurred to the following graphs Error Free Seconds Shows the amount of time during which no errored seconds occurred on the T1 link counted as a percentage of the time interval shown Errored Seconds Shows the percentage of time during which a Severely Errored Seconds or Bursty Errored Seconds condition existed calculated on the percent of the time interval shown Transmission Errors Shows the percentage of time during which an Unavailable Seconds or Controlled Slip Seconds condition existed calculated on the percent of the time interval shown See Chapter 11 Displaying System Information for information on these types of errors Congestion and CIR issues are clearly identified by this window Using this window you can determine end to end performance for a PVC The lines into the cloud change based upon the upper right radio button selected Tx Rx or Both
176. er icon to open the Configuration Manager main window see the window on page 6 5 2 Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area in the upper right of the window then Property down the center of the screen The Custom Property Editor window opens fe iesin T bajy Proy mF Prae Liai Fila Gren mman Fist Moet Core AAT MTI Treil kisig Falli WE 3 Select a DLCI from the Trap list and select the Edit button to the right of the list The Edit Trap window opens May 1999 Preliminary 6 9 Using NetScout Manager Plus i lmals linblix cutis r Thee Taji Boe Pkr i ire vara em iesiri Oe hlii i Bisig al _ Boe M Fury iea im wae or er ee ee e e e BLE Frama fw Poisson Theres Falling Tere bd Reunited 4 Edit any trap defaults that may be required See Step 4 on page 6 12 for field settings you may want to change 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to apply your changes The window closes and the Configuration Manager main window reappears 6 Select the Install button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window to apply your changes Refer to Editing Alarms in Chapter 8 of the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide to change alarm thresholds May 1999 Preliminary Using NetScout Manager Plus Adding SLV Alarms Manually Once DLCls have been discovered SLV alarms should be defined
177. eral System Options Select General to display or change the general system configuration options see Table 8 3 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration System General Table 8 3 General System Options 1 of 2 Test Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether or not loopback and pattern tests have a duration after which they are terminated automatically Enable All Loopback and Pattern tests have a timeout This setting is recommended when the FrameSaver unit is managed remotely through an in band data stream If the FrameSaver unit is accidently commanded to execute a disruptive test on the interface providing the management access control can be regained after the timeout expires terminating the test Disable Loopback and pattern tests must be manually terminated Test Duration min Possible Settings 1 120 Default Setting 10 Specifies the maximum duration of the tests Display Conditions This option only appears when Test Timeout is set to Enable 1 120 Sets the Test Timeout period in minutes inclusive 8 26 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 3 General System Options 2 of 2 Primary Clock Source Possible Settings Net1 DSX Internal Default Setting Net1 Allows you to select the primary clock source for the unit The source selected prov
178. erver Router FrameSaver Frame 9126 Relay gt Unit Router pin Ses FrameSaver Paradyne OpenLane and NetScout NMS Applications Relay Switch Relay Switch ie F 9126 Frame Relay rameSaver Frame Relay Router 9128 Unit Relay Unit NETWOTK Router Lal FrameSaver NOC Network Operation Center 9128 Unit 98 16192 Customer access to SLV data is through a standard Netscape or Microsoft Web browser The customer s profile which contains the login information and specifies the device IP addresses that the customer is authorized to view prevents unauthorized access to the SLV data The customer enters the URL for the customer s subdirectory enters the appropriate login and selects a report See Creating OoenLane Service Level Management SLM Reports in Chapter 5 Using the OpenLane NMS for information about these reports May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Typical Applications If LAN probing application layer probing or packet capture capability is desired a NetScout probe can be used in conjunction with a FrameSaver 9124 at the central site In the example below the FrameSaver 9124 is connected to NetScout s probe which is using NetScout s NMS application to provide full probe capability at the central or regional site Central Remote Frame Site Sites Relay Router FrameSaver 9124 Frame NetScout Relay Frame Unit Router Relay Network
179. es to data coming into that interface For example the priority set for DLCls on Port 1 applies to data coming into Port 1 from the attached equipment such as a router Display Conditions This option only appears when Committed Burst Size is set to Other Low Data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Data configured for the DLCI has medium priority High Data configured for the DLCI has high priority Outbound Management Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting Medium Specifies the relative priority for management traffic sent on management PVCs transmitted on this DLCI to the network Display Conditions This option is not available on a user data port Low Management data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Management data configured for the DLCI has medium priority High Management data configured for the DLCI has high priority May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Configuring PVC Connections Select PVC Connections to display or change the configuration options for the PVC connections see Table 8 10 DLCI records must have been configured for the interface first See Maximum PVCs EDLCls and Management PVCs in Chapter 1 About the FrameSaver SLV for a table of the maximum number of PVCs that you can configure B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration PVC
180. esses and subnet masks direct PVCs to remote units limiting SNMP access 9124 A2 GH30 00 Index mixing private and public addressing on same network scheme examples selecting a scheme B 1 IT manager service level report K keys keyboard screen function L Lamp Test 10 18 11 27 LAN adapter and cable D 3 latency round trip launching graphs leaders summary report LEDs 11 9 descriptions network and DSX interface viewing 10 3 limiting async terminal access FTP access SNMP access 9 6 through IP addresses Telnet access 9 3 Line Build Out LBO Coding Format Equalization Framing Format Loopback Link Destination diagnostics frame relay statistics 10 30 integrity 5 15 Protocol Source Sonon E Traps nteraces e2 TS Management linkUp and linkDown events traps March 1999 IN 5 Index LLB 11 194 11 22 LMI Behavior Clearing Event N3 Down 10 15 11 6 Error Event N2 frame relay statistics Heartbeat T1 Inbound Heartbeat T2 N4 Measurement Period T3 packet ag ee Parameters pass through Protocol signaling errors Status Enquiry N1 uploading packet capture data 10 40 local external DTE loopback locked out LOF LED logging in logging out Login ID _9 11 modifying and deleting Required logins Loopback DSU and CSU C 11 Port DTE In
181. etected all ones are sent to the network on the DSO channels allocated to the port Enable Interchange circuit CA ITU 105 RTS is monitored to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE Disable RTS is not monitored RTS is assumed to be asserted and data is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 35 Configuration Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections The system allows you to assign data paths between the various interfaces to share the T1 network Assuming that the Network Port interface is enabled you can make the following cross connection assignments m Frame relay links to Network interface time slots DSX 1 to the Network interface time slots You can also clear cross connection assignments for the system or for a selected slot or interface see page 8 42 NOTE Although it is not required it is suggested that you progress through each screen in order from top to bottom Use the following procedures to assign cross connections Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface Before assigning Network time slots for use by Frame Relay configure the Network physical and Frame Relay options if needed then allow Time Slot Discovery to autodetect and assign the appropriate time slots to Frame Relay If there are multiple Frame Relay data links on the Network interface or if Time Slot Discovery is not curre
182. etected within the same time period 10E 7 Declares an EER if more than 9 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1076 or 107 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 10 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 8 Declares an EER if more than 41 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 107 1076 1079 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 42 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 9 Declares an EER if more than 4 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 1078 10 7 1076 10 5 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 5 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period Circuit Identifier Possible Settings Text Field Clear Default Setting blank Identifies the transmission vendor s circuit information to facilitate troubleshooting Text Field Edit or display circuit identifier information maximum 255 characters Clear Removes the circuit identifier information May 1999 Preliminary 8 31 Configuration Configuring the DSX 1 Interface Physical Options Select DSX 1 to display or change the physical configuration options when a DSX 1 interface is installed see Table 8 5 B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration gt DSX 1 2 Choose whether or not the DSX 1 interface will be provided by the port Table 8 5 DSX 1 Physical Options
183. etermine whether the problem is with the T1 facility or in the circuitry of the remote device Other ee ER am Interface 1S Interface a CAUTION Payload Loopback may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted 97 15337 A PLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Line Loopback Repeater Loopback Send Remote Line Loopback or an active Monitor Pattern on this network interface Payload or Repeater Loopback on any other T1 interface with DSOs assigned to this network interface Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this interface m Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous and assigned to this network interface 11 20 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Repeater Loopback 9124 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting The Repeater Loopback RLB loops data received from the data ports and the DSX 1 interface after the signal has passed through the framing circuitry Use RLB to ensure that all of the data is correct up to the point where it is sent over the interface This helps to indicate that the FrameSaver unit is operational An attached device or test equipment should generate and monitor data to
184. etric The Far set is based on information kept by the unit at the other end of the local loop and is only available when ANSI performance report messages are enabled in the unit Summary information that appears near the top of the screen include Near Far Current Interval Timer Contains the number of seconds that have elapsed in the current 15 minute interval for the near or far information which can show a value up to 900 seconds Near Far ESF Error Events Maintains a count of ESF error events as specified by AT amp T TR 54016 which counts CRC and OOF events A maximum of 65 535 error events can be counted Once 65535 is reached it stays at that number until the network issues a reset command May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance You can collect the following metrics for the network interface Table 10 13 ESF Line Performance Statistics Statistic Errored Seconds ES Unavailable Seconds UAS Severely Errored Seconds SES Bursty Errored Seconds BES Controlled Slip Seconds CSS Loss of Frame Count LOFC Worst Interval What It Indicates Any second with one or more ESF Error events Any second in which service is unavailable Begins incrementing at the onset of 10 consecutive seconds of severely errored seconds SES and stops incrementing after 10 consecutive seconds of no SESs Any second with 320 or more CRC errors or one o
185. etwork Management Data Physical Connection saes PVC Connection 1 for Management Data 1 for User Data 99 16290 The Communication Port options should be configured for a separate out of band management link Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication Communication Port See Table 8 17 Communication Port Options in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for information about the Communication Port options NOTE When Port Use is set to Net Link on the COM Port the RIP option must be disabled set to None to prevent user data from traveling across the management link When the communication COM port is configured as the IP management link the async user interface is accessible through Telnet See Table 8 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for information about the Telnet options 2 6 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Management Control Configuring End to End Management Control End to end management control methods are typically used for accessing remote site units that are not colocated with the NMS When managing the FrameSaver unit remotely you can establish a management link across the network in one of three ways You can m Use a shared PVC embedded DLCl m Use a dedicated DLCI or PVC m Use RFC 1490 routers for transparent management control Management Control Using PVC Multiplexing EDLCD This is the preferred method
186. etwork Health compatibility Configuration Auto Active 10 13 customer storage areas displaying and changing options 8 8 menu branch 4 4 option areas 8 6 saving eee tables upload download configuring added SLV units elements end to end management control local management management DLCI NetScout Manager Plus the system congestion DLCI IN 2 connectivity 11 18 IP Control characters keys 4 6 Leads Ignore menu branch viewing leads controlling async terminal access 9 2 external device access 9 10 FTP access 9 3 SNMP access Telnet access 9 3 conversation elements copyrights A CRC 10 32 creating a login 9 11 a separate management link re additional DLCI records new PVC connections management links 8 8 PVC connections user history files cross connections crossover EIA 232 cable D 4 CSU Loopback CTS sorte tt CTS down to Port pevee E current software revision customer service level report customer specified storage rad D Data Delivery Ratio DDR 1 4 Link Control Identifier DLCI Port physical options port connector pin assignments Rate Kbps selection criteria uploading SLV and packet capture 10 40 Date amp Time setting 8 5 DCE Manager installation and setup NMS support March 1999 9124 A2 GH30 00 DDR 1 4 DE Set Default IP Destination Delete key 4 6
187. face or any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this interface Send V 54 or FT 1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous and assigned to this network interface Data Channel Loopback on the frame relay link on this network interface B gt Procedure To start and stop a Remote Line Loopback 11 22 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test gt Network Physical Tests PRI Physical Tests Select the desired Network interface shown in the screen title Select the code Up or Down in the Send Line Loopback field Up Puts a remote device in loopback Down Takes the remote device out of loopback Highlight Send and press Enter to start the test The code is sent for 10 seconds View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting Send and Monitor Pattern Tests 9124 A2 GH30 00 The pattern tests enable a FrameSaver unit to either send or monitor a Known bit pattern These tests generate industry standard bit patterns that can be used to determine whether information is being correctly transmitted across a circuit The following test patterns are available QRSS 11 All zeros 2047 All ones 2E15 1 219 1 1 in 8 2E20 1 220 1 3 in 24 User defined 2 byte test pattern a0a0 63 A
188. figuration Changing the Frame Relay Discovery Mode Configuration options set by discovery mode can be manually modified refined or deleted at any time using the Configuration menus No previously discovered and configured DLCls or cross connections will be removed unless authorized Additional discovered DLCls will be configured according to the current Frame Relay Discovery mode setting Selecting or changing the setting will not affect IP Addresses or Subnet Masks If setting up a FrameSaver unit going to a remote site only the units Node IP Address and Subnet Mask need to be preconfigured the default 1MPort setting automatically configures the unit lf 1MPort is not the setting required for your application change the Frame Relay Discovery mode before connecting the network cable or editing discovered option settings Otherwise the FrameSaver unit will start discovering DLCls as soon as it powers up To recover from this problem if it occurs Any DLCls or PVC connections Select a discovered DLCI or PVC connection have been configured manually and edit as needed using the Configuration menus Only a local management PVC Select the desired Frame Relay Discovery mode between the router and the and Save FrameSaver unit has been configured Save causes the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt to appear a f Yes y is entered clears all discovered and manually configured DLCI records and PVC connections e
189. figured Disable No frame relay discovery or automatic configuration takes place The FrameSaver unit will be configured manually 1 See page 8 13 to see the auto configuration that takes place 3 Save your selection Respond yes or no to the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt see page 8 11 If Yes y is entered clears all discovered and manually configured DLCI records and PVC connections except for the management PVC between a data port and router This is so communication with the unit remains If No n is entered no previously discovered or manually configured DLCls or PVC connections are removed and newly discovered DLCls will be configured according to the new discovery mode 4 Go to the Configuration menu and change any node specific configuration options that may be needed 8 12 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration The following table shows the automatic configuration that occurs within the FrameSaver unit when a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is selected Automatic Configuration for Selected Frame Relay Discovery Mode 1 of 4 If the mode selected is Then setup configuration is Multiplexed Management DLCI Records 1MPort Network DLCI Number is automatically created from the LMI status response message This DLCI will contain multiple EDLCls one for For DLCI Record information Port 1 and one for management see Table 8 9 DLCI Rec
190. file are listed with their OIDs The frame relay interface number 101015001 must replace IFN and the DLCI number to be monitored must replace DLCI Example frCircuitSentFrames Change 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 IFN DLCI to 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 101015001 301 The only valid interface number for a FrameSaver 9126 or 9128 is 101015001 4 Edit the new file as needed Refer to Creating UDH Files in Chapter 28 Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information Installing the User Defined History Files Once the user defined history files have been created the files need to be installed History files are installed from the command line prompt in NetScout Manager Plus Should the FrameSaver unit be reset these files will need to be reinstalled The command used to install a new user history table is located in S NSHOME bin CAUTION Do not use user_history_table_1 or 2 UserHistory1 and UserHistory2 are the default user history files used to keep SLV data for reports Editing either of these files will destroy SLV reporting capability May 1999 Preliminary Using NetScout Manager Plus B gt Procedure i Type dvuhist f agentname user_history_table_number config number_of_buckets interval download_file udh to load user defined history files for the frame relay link Example dvuhist f Dallas51l 3 config 30 60 Dallas51k udh The interval must be entered in seconds
191. gnal is received on the DSX 1 interface DTE has detected a LOS or OOF condition A yellow alarm signal is received on the specified network interface 1 Network cable problem 2 T1 facility problem May 1999 Preliminary for the network interface is correct Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends Contact your network provider Check that the cable is securely attached at both ends for the primary clock source interface Contact the network provider Check that the cable is securely attached at both ends for the primary and secondary clock source interfaces Contact the network provider Check that the DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends Check the status of the attached equipment Check that your network cable is securely attached at both ends 2 Contact your network provider 1 Record the failure code before resetting the FrameSaver unit otherwise the error information will be lost 10 17 Operation and Maintenance Test Status Messages These test messages appear in the right column of the System and Test Status screen You have the option of allowing the test to continue or aborting the test Refer to Chapter 13 Troubleshooting for more information on tests including how to start and stop them Table 10 7 Test Status Messages 1 of 2 Message What It Indicates DCLB Active Port 1 or A Data Channel Loopba
192. he sending manager s IP address is listed on the SNMP NMS Security Options screen Enable Performs security checks Disable Does not perform security checks Number of Managers Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit An IP address must be configured for each management system allowed to send messages Configure IP addresses in the NMS n IP Address configuration option 1 10 Specifies the number of authorized SNMP managers NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Provides the IP address of an SNMP manager that is authorized to send SNMP messages to the unit If an SNMP message is received from an unauthorized NMS and its IP address cannot be matched here access is denied and an authenticationFailure trap is generated If a match is found the type of access read only or read write is determined by the corresponding Access Type Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the NMS IP address Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 65 Configuration Table 8 15 SNMP NMS Security Options 2 of 2
193. he customer s pool of IP addresses The illustration below shows this scheme of public and private IP addressing which is like having two networks in one DLCI 200 lt i 7 P v Ey Frame 10 10 10 2 Relay rege gra seni eae Router I RTO4A oe 135 18 2 2 DLCI 900 Frame 10 10 10 1 lt l0 eee Relay Frame Relay i 135 18 2 1 aa Frame Physical Connection PVC Connection 135 18 2 3 99 16224 01 Both networks share the near to far end customer ordered DLCls 200 and 210 so that user data and management data use EDLCIs multiplexed DLCls e g 200 2 Management of the far end devices is performed via EDLCIls FrameSaver EDLCls enhance standard DLCls creating a communication path within a communication path Using the NextEDGE FrameSaver RIP feature far end NextEDGE FrameSaver devices can be identified automatically and reported to the management station via DLC 900 DLCI 900 is not propagated to the network by the router The DLCI terminates in the NextEDGE system and is only used for management B 2 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Preferred Method 9124 A2 GH30 00 IP Addressing Instead of having one PVC for the router DLCI 909 and another for the FrameSaver unit DLCI 910 management of the network can be accomplished using only the router PVC when the NOC uses a FrameSaver unit which has its own IP address as seen in the illustration below Simply create a PVC between the NOC
194. he item is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary C21 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Object ID OID Cross Reference Numeric Order The NextEDGE unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap or a log event is sent reports like User History This cross reference is to aid you in determining the NetScout Manager Plus identifies these items by their OIDs in some of their condition being graphed Table C 7 Object ID Cross Reference 1 of 3 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 6 5 1 1 2 1 Unavailable Seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 C 22 1795 2 24 2 6 9 1795 2 24 2 6 9 1795 2 24 2 6 9 1795 2 24 2 6 9 1795 2 24 2 6 9 1795 2 24 2 6 9 1795 2 24 2 6 9 1795 2 24 2 6 9 1795 2 24 2 6 9 Invalid Frames Short Frames Long Frames Rx Discards Tx Discards Rx Total Errors Tx Total Errors Rx Overruns Tx Underruns May 1999 Preliminary MIB devSyncPortStats mib RFC 1406 Tag devSyncPortStatsUASs MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLinkR
195. ho Shots sneekoterss eee sandwd a 5 28 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary ill Contents 6 Using NetScout Manager Plus m The NetScout Advantage 0c ccc cece eee eens 6 1 Using a NetScout Manager Plus NMS Application 6 2 m Installing NetScout Manager Plus 0 00 cece eee eee eens 6 2 Configuring NetScout Manager Plus 000 c eee eee eee 6 3 Before You Get Started nannan eee nes 6 3 Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network 2 0 0 0c ccc cece ccc cee teen een cence nee e eee Verifying Domains and Groups 00 cece eee eee eens 6 5 Correcting Domains and Groups saaana annann nrnna Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template 0 c0c eee eee 6 8 Edn AlAMS sm or gon we amb nasien Fe a weet HOLS baie ae E Adding SLV Alarms Manually 0 000 cece eee eee eens 6 11 Creating History Files 00 0 ccc ce cence eee e ene e nee eees Installing the User Defined History Files 00005 Monitoring a DLCl s History Data 00 0 cece eee eee eee Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus 6 19 Statistical Windows Supported 0 c eee eee ee eee 6 20 7 Concord s Network Health m Installation and Setup of Network Health 0 0 c eee eee 7 2 Discovering FrameSaver Elements 00 00 e cece eae 7 3 Configuring the Discovered Elements 0
196. hose viewed from the NMS B gt Procedure To clear all statistics Performance Statistics Clear All Statistics B gt Procedure To clear specific sets of statistics m Use the ClrSLV amp DLCIStats function key to reset the SLV and DLCI performance statistic counters for the currently displayed DLCI from one of the following screens Performance Statistics Service Level Verification Performance Statistics DLCI m Use the ClrLinkStats function key to reset the frame relay link performance Statistics Performance Statistics Frame Relay m Use the ClrNearStats and ClrFarStats function keys to reset ESF line performance statistics Performance Statistics ESF Line Determining Whether a Statistic Is Incrementing Use this procedure when you do not have a Level 1 access and you want to observe and estimate the frequency or duration of a specific condition e g gathering information for reporting a problem to the network determine whether a Statistic is incrementing B gt Procedure To determine whether a statistic is incrementing 1 Record the accumulated value for the statistic of interest the beginning value 2 Press r for Refresh to see if it changes 3 Ifthe statistic is incrementing record the ending value and the amount of time between the beginning and ending values Continue to Refresh the screen until you have a sense of how serious the problem might be 10 26 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30
197. how the FrameSaver unit will handle a change in the LMI state Sometimes referred to as LMI pass through Independent Handles the LMI state of each interface separately so that the LMI state of one interface has no effect on the LMI state of another interface Provides LMI Spoofing This is the recommended setting for Network Service Providers NSPs Port 1_Follows_Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on Port 1 when LMI on the network interface goes down disabling Port 1 and deasserting its control leads When LMI on the network interface comes back up Port 1 is reenabled and its control leads are reasserted The LMI state on Port 1 has no effect on the LMI state on the network interface That is Port 1 s LMI follows the network interface s LMI This setting is useful if the router connected to Port 1 is used to initiate recovery when network failures are detected Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Port 1 goes down disabling the network interface and deasserting its control leads When LMI on Port 1 comes back up the network interface is reenabled The LMI state on the network interface has no effect on the LMI state on Port 1 That is the network interface s LMI follows Port 1 s LMI Used at central sites this setting is useful when the remote site router on the other end of the PVC connection can initiate recovery via a redundant central site when there is a catastrophic central site LAN or
198. ic on page C 7 RMON Specific on page C 13 These traps are listed in alphabetical order within each table Trap warmStart This trap indicates that the NextEDGE unit has been reset as a result of a reset command or a power disruption Table C 1 warmStart Trap Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause warmsStart NextEDGE unit has just Reset command sent reinitialized and stabilized itself Power disruption String Variable Bindings Unit reset devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary C 3 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Trap authenticationFailure Table C 2 authenticationFailure Trap Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause authenticationFailure Access tothe NextEDGE Jj SNMP protocol message not unit was attempted and properly authenticated failed Three unsuccessful attempts were made to enter a correct login user ID password combination IP Address security is enabled and a message was received from the SNMP Manager whose address was not on the lost of approved managers String Unauthorized access attempted Variable Bindings devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib Traps linkUp and linkDown These traps are supported on the following interfaces Network PRI or BRI DSX 1 and synchronous data ports Physical sublayer interfaces Frame relay logical link layer interfaces Table C 3 lin
199. ider Management Overview 9124 A2 GH30 00 In the service provider example below the service provider s management data is multiplexed with the customer data using EDLCls traveling between the customer s central site and the customer branches A dedicated DLCI is configured from the customer s central site to the service provider s network control center so the customer s entire network can be managed from the service provider s network operation control center using a single DLCI This dedicated DLCI carries only management data no customer data is carried Customer NMS Control Center Site Frame Relay Switch Relay Switch Relay Switch Relay FrameSaver Router 9124 Unit Customer Branch 1 P p E _ LJ er ale LI Tait Fame a V4 a O Relay Frame Router Relay FrameSaver FrameSaver Router 962x Unit 962x Unit Physical Connection PVC Connection Using EDLCIls sesenees PVC Connection Using Standard Non multiplexed DLCI ene The service provider s diagnostic capabilities are greatly enhanced using this topology Service provider troubleshooting and management of the customer s network is completely independent of the customer s routers PVC Loopbacks and Pattern tests can be performed without disrupting customer data May 1999 Preliminary 2 3 Management Control Managing the FrameSaver Unit Local management is accomplished through the f
200. ides all of the timing within the FrameSaver unit and the clocks for all of the external interfaces Failure of the clock specified by this configuration option results in automatic fallback to the Secondary Clock Source configuration option setting NOTE For the Primary and Secondary Clock Source options only Internal can be selected for both options All other selections must have different settings e g if Primary Clock Source is set to Net1 Secondary Clock Source cannot be set to Net1 Net1 The primary clock is derived from the Network1 T1 interface DSX The primary clock is derived from the DSX T1 interface This setting only appears if the DSX 1 interface is installed and enabled see Configuring the DSX 1 Interface page 8 32 Internal The primary clock is the internal clock Secondary Clock Source Possible Settings Net1 DSX Internal Default Setting Internal Provides a secondary clock source when the primary clock source fails The source selected for this configuration option provides all of the timing within the unit and the clocks for all of the external interfaces The clock source will switch back to primary when the primary clock source returns and J is stable for 10 seconds If the secondary clock source fails the clock source will switch to internal The clock source will switch back to primary when the primary clock source returns and is stable for 10 seconds NOTE For the Primary and Se
201. ied by for the network port Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port May 1999 Preliminary 10 15 Operation and Maintenance Table 10 6 Health and Status Messages 4 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the network interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 1 Network cable problem Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends 2 T1 facility problem Contact your network provider LOS at DSX 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 1 DSX 1 cable problem Check that the DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends 2 No signal being Check the DTE status transmitted from the DTE NAM Download Failed A download attempt was Retry downloading interrupted and failed to Contact complete ontact service representative NAM Fail appears on The FrameSaver unit Record the 8 digit code from the the System Health and detects an internal System Health and Status Status screen hardware failure screen then contact your service representative Network Com Link The communication link for Check the router connected to Down the COM port is down and the COM port the COM port is config
202. if the port is disabled or if the port is configured to monitor DTR and or RTS and the lead s is not asserted 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 10 5 Operation and Maintenance Device Messages These messages appear in the messages area at the bottom of the screens All device messages are listed in alphabetical order Table 10 4 Device Messages 1 of 6 Message What It Indicates What To Do Access level is n User s access level is 2 No action needed Read only or 3 user is not authorized to change configurations Already Active Test selected is already Allow test to continue running Select another test Stop the test Blank Entries New had been selected No action needed Removed from the Administer Logins screen no entry was made then Save was selected Reenter the Login ID Password and Access Level Cannot delete Trap Delete was selected from No action needed or configure Manager the Management PVCs another path for traps and try Options screen but the again PVC had been defined as a trap destination Command Complete Configuration has been No action needed saved or all tests have been aborted Connection Refused Two menu driven user Wait and try again interface sessions are Seen ai an FTP already in use when a terminal Telnet session was attempted Destination Not Destination entered is Enter another destination Unique already being used indicator DLCI in connect
203. ified the current one is used put file file2 Copy file1 from a local directory on the host to file 2 in the current directory of the FrameSaver unit node If file2 is not specified the file will be named file7 on the FrameSaver unit node send file file 2 Same as a put pwd Print the name of the current directory of the FrameSaver unit node bin Places the FTP session in binary transfer mode 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 10 37 Operation and Maintenance Upgrading System Software If you need to upgrade the FrameSaver unit s program code you must transfer the upgrade of the nam ocd file in the system memory directory using the put command NOTE Upgrades can be performed through the network using a Management PVC or through the COM port if Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 9 15 Communication Port Options B gt Procedure To download software 1 2 3 A 10 38 Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading Type bin to enter binary transfer mode Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the upgrade provided this function is supported by your equipment Type cd system to change to the system directory Perform a put of Rxxxxxx ocd xxxxxx being the software release number to the nam ocd file to start the upgrade If the message displayed is Then nam ocd File Transfer Complete The download was successful The file is l
204. in progress when Start was selected to start another test or was active on the same or another interface when Start was selected May 1999 Preliminary software Try again making sure you type the filename correctly Exit the FTP session or download another file Reenter information using valid characters Reenter the date in the month day 4 digit year format Reenter the date in the month day 4 digit year format Reenter the time in the hour minutes format No action needed Try again Contact your system administrator to verify your password Wait until other test ends and message clears Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path main test Stop the test from the same screen the test was started from 10 7 Operation and Maintenance 10 8 Table 10 4 Device Messages 3 of 6 Message What It Indicates What To Do Limit of six Login IDs An attempt to enter a new Delete another login password reached login ID was made and the combination limit of six login password combinations has been reached Reenter the new login ID Limit of Mgmt PVCs New was selected from the Do not create the reached PVC Connection Table and management PVC the maximum number of management PVCs has Delete another management already been created PVC and try again Limit of PVC New was selected from the Do not create the PVC Connections reached PVC Connection Table and c
205. ine graph pie chart bar chart or table format Any amount of time can be specified for the reporting period These reports can help identify the reasons a DLCI has acquired a poor Health Index rating See the Exceptions Report on page 7 9 for information about Health Index ratings All of the charts and tables seen online can also be provided on printed reports The following pages show an example of a printed LAN WAN Health Report May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Concord s Network Health Reports Applicable to SLV Units This section identifies the Network Health reports that apply to FrameSaver SLV products summarizes relevant information and tells you how to use the reports NOTE Network Health provides information with each chart or table generally referred to as a report Click on the hyperlink Explanation of for an explanation of the report and its features You can also refer to the Network Health Reports Guide Exceptions Reports These reports identify those DLCls that have exceeded a specified number of accumulated exception points It is a good idea to run this report daily so that DLCls having the most problems can be attended to first DLCls contained on this report need immediate attention Eavan Sie Bajai Elaraeni Faking Terini aT E E E j Fr IPLA Khe Frere Belew i1 TE kpn HE di idan f 5 T F T Ly Hank Klemen Mare Sol Tope Poors Exrepiigm Lamirg Excepiien LaalT Pa
206. ing on the interface String testString test stopped on ifString SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Synchronous ifIndex RFC 1573 enterpriseDLC IDown trap is Data Port Admin issued when DLCI Status is tAaminstatus set to Inactive RFC 1573 Service Side of the enterpriseDLCIUp trap is Frame Relay Link ifOperStatus RFC 1573 issued when DLCI Status is ifType RFC 1573 set to active frPVCEndptDLClIndex RFC 1604 frPVCEndptRevdSig Status RFC 1604 T1 Network ifIndex RFC 1573 enterpriseDLCIDown trap is issued when DLCI Status is ifAdminStatus ive DTE Side of the RFC 1573 jaa Frame Relay Link ifOperStatus RFC 1573 enterpriseDLClUp trap is issued when DLCI Status is ifType RFC 1573 set to active frCircuitDIci RFC 2115 frCircuitState RFC 2115 frPVCEndptDLClIlndex RFC 1604 frPVCEndptRevdSig Status RFC 1604 C 12 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps RMON Specific Two traps are defined to support the Alarm and Events Groups of RMON which are shown below with their variable bindings See RMON Alarm Defaults on page C 14 for the default values that will generate RMON specific traps Variable Bindings risingAlarm and fallingAlarm Table C 7 risingAlarm and fallingAlarm Variable Bindings Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause risingAlar
207. ingle flexible and standards based frame relay monitoring solution that provides the following features Interoperability with other FrameSaver Units Operates with FrameSaver 9120 9620s FrameSaver SLV 9124 9624s 9126 9128s and the international 9820 C 9820s IP Connectivity Supports connectivity within an IP Internet Protocol network for up to 300 IP routes to provide IP routing for SNMP Telnet and FTP messages Standards Based Protocol Support Supports two link layer protocols for connection to an external SNMP manager or network device via the COM or modem port and the three standard LMI protocols for communication over the frame relay interface Frame Relay Aware Supports diagnostic and network management features over the frame relay network using the Annex A Annex D and Standard UNI User Network Interface LMI management protocol The NextEDGE system s frame relay capability also supports Inband management channels over the frame relay network using dedicated PVCs Unique nondisruptive diagnostics CIR monitoring on a PVC basis Multiple PVCs on an interface Multiplexing management PVCs with user data PVCs Multiplexing multiple PVCs going to the same location onto a single network PVC Maximum PVCs EDLCls and Management PVCs The number of remote sites and PVCs that can be created for each FrameSaver SLV 9124 is Summarized in the following table Central Site Remote Si
208. ion 8 44 Table 8 8 Frame Relay and LMI Options 3 of 4 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies to and configured for the network side of the UNI only Display Conditions This option only appears when LMI Parameters is set to Custom and only on a user data port 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 parameter which is the time interval in seconds that the network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry messages received N4 from the user side Applies to and configured for the network side of the UNI only Display Conditions This option only appears when LMI Parameters is set to Custom and only on a user data port 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 Frame Relay DSOs Base Rate Possible Settings Nx64 Nx56 Default Setting Nx64 Selects the base rate for the DSOs allocated to frame relay on the Network interface Display Conditions This option only appears for the network interface Nx64 The base rate is 64 kbps Nx56
209. ion User tried to delete a DLCI No action needed or Delete connection first that was part of a connection Delete the connection then delete the DLCI Duplicate DLCI DLCI number entered is not No action needed previous Number unique for the frame relay contents of the DLCI number link field is restored 10 6 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 10 4 Device Messages 2 of 6 Message What It Indicates What To Do File Transfer Complete A file transfer was Switch to the newly downloaded 9124 A2 GH30 00 Seen at an FTP terminal File Transfer Failed Invalid file Seen at an FTP terminal Invalid Character x Invalid date must be mm dd yyyy Invalid date and or time Invalid time must be hh mm Invalid Already Active Invalid Password Invalid Test Combination performed successfully A file transfer was attempted but it was not successful A non valid printable ASCII character has been entered A non valid date was entered on the System Information screen A non valid date or time was entered on the System Information screen The date does not exist e g February 29th A non valid system time was entered on the System Information screen A test was already in progress when it was selected Login is required and an incorrect password was entered access Is denied A conflicting loopback or pattern test was
210. ion and Setup of DCE Manager 00 0 cece eee 5 2 Installation and Setup of Performance Wizard 00005 5 2 Installing and Starting OpenLane Performance Wizard 5 3 Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to Your Network 5 4 Setting Up for Collection of Historical Data 0 4 5 5 Accessing NetScout Manager Plus 00 ce eee ences 5 6 Creating PVC Connections 000 ccc eens 5 7 Setting Frame and Burst Ranges 0 00 cece eee eee 5 8 Getting Error Messages o2 236 cis gvevadeutagesta dete agseea des os 5 9 m Viewing OpenLane Performance Wizard Graphs 005 5 10 Frame Relay Access Channel Aggregated Summary 5 11 Frame Relay Physical Link Integrity 00ceee eee eee DS1 Physical Link Integrity T1 Only 0 000 cee DS1 Physical Link Diagnostics T1 Only 22008 PVO TMOUONDUT coon oe et eee iia iaia k oie e oi a a oia a 5 18 Frame Relay DLCI Congestion nunan annann reren PVC Data Delivery Analysis nananana nananana 5 22 m Creating OpenLane Service Level Management SLM Reports 5 26 Web Browsers Supported 0 00 cece cnn eee ees 5 26 Installation and Setup of SLM Reports 00 000 ee 5 27 Displaying the Log in Screen ccc eens 5 27 Reports Administration a todwnde sae peosaae eee do eee e an 5 27 Viewing ROPO a cnaavcxcyn dd i
211. ion below shows both local and remote management across the network Management data Is being routed from frame relay Router A to IP Router B then being redirected by the router to FrameSaver Unit B Both management and customer data are carried over the same PVC a separate dedicated management PVC is not required SNMP NMS l F FrameSaver Relay Unit B Network D A WAN Link VT100 Emulation 1 Cable 1 Cable and Telnet or 1 PVC 2PVCs NMS using SNMP Frame Frame Relay Relay RFC 1490 RFC 1490 Router A Router B Physical Connection PVC Connection 98 16221 NOTE This is not an optimum method due to router dependency at the remote site which can make fault isolation more difficult when there is a LAN or router failure May 1999 Preliminary 2 9 Management Control 2 10 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Typical Applications 9124 A2 GH30 00 This chapter includes the following information Multinational Frame Relay Solution on page 3 2 SLV Frame Relay Access on page 3 3 Access to Frame Relay Network on page 3 6 Mixing FrameSaver Units in Applications on page 3 7 UsingAll 9624 FrameSaver Units at Remote Sites on page 3 8 Mixing 912x and 962x FrameSaver Units at Remote Sites on page 3 9 PVC Multiplexing Application on page 3 10 Using Auto Configuration on page 3 11 Back to Back Operation on page 3 12 May 1999 Preliminary Typical Applic
212. is selected The DLCI must be defined for the link i e has a DLCI record and it must not be part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLC must be unconfigured for the DLCI NOTES DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank Clearing Link also clears the DLCI 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number inclusive Primary EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is selected EDLCIs identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCls that are unique to those DLCls Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI Use 1 62 to identify secondary EDLCls Use the primary EDLCI for customer data which has a higher utilization rate than management data with slightly less line overhead Display Conditions This option does not appear if the DLCI field does not reference a multiplexed DLCI NOTE Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses EDLCI field 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number inclusive 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 59 Configuration Table 8 12 Management PVC Options 4 of 4 Primary Link RIP Possible Settings None Proprietary Standard_out Default Setting Multiplexed DLCls Proprietary
213. isabled Enable Answers incoming calls and establishes connection to the remote terminal or IP network Disable Does not answer incoming calls Refer to the Control Characters table on page 8 78 8 76 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 18 External Modem on Com Port Options 2 of 2 Alternate IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the Alternate IP Address for the COM port when the alternate phone directory is used If this configuration option is not configured i e it is zero the COM port s primary IP Address is used when the alternate telephone directory is used Display Conditions This option Only appears if External Modem Commands is set to AT a s only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication lonk Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 8 17 Communication Port Options 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the COM port which you Can view or edit Clear Clears the IP address for the COM port and fills the address with zeros Alternate Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the Alternate Subnet Mask for the COM port when the alternate phone directory is used Display Conditions This option Only appears if Externa
214. itiated Pvc 11 17 Remote 11 22 Repeater Los 11 6 at DSX 1 10 16 at Network linkDown trap C 5 Loss of Signal linkDown trap IN 6 M Main Menu screen branch maintenance making input selections 4 9 Management and Communication options configuring end to end control control and IP addressing creating a separate link General SNMP options PVCs 8 56 total number dedicated selecting interface 8 4 service provider 2 3 SNMP using a dedicated DLCI using PVC multiplexing EDLCI using RFC 1490 routers managing FrameSaver unit Menu structure menu branches 4 4 path 4 5 selecting from menu driven user interface 1 5 messages Device Health and Sau os Self Test Results system System and Test Status 10 12 Test Status 10 18 MIB downloading support minimal remote configuration mixing private and public addressing on same network Mode changing Operating demos Test model number modem entering directory phone numbers setting up 8 16 March 1999 9124 A2 GH30 00 modifying a login Monitor 511 test pattern C 11 DTR test pattern Monitor RTS monitoring DLCI history data 6 16 FrameSaver unit 10 11 LEDs using NetScout Manager Plus 6 19 Multiplexed DLCI DLCI Type PVCs 11 18 multiplexing applications N N1 LMI Status Enquiry N2 LMI Error Event N3 LMI Clearing Event NAM D
215. itiated Loopbacks Possible Settings Local Disable Default Setting Disable Allows a local external DTE Loopback to be started or stopped via the port s attached data terminal equipment using the port s interchange lead LL ITU 141 Local The DTE attached to the port controls the local external DTE Loopback Disable The DTE attached to the port cannot control the local external DTE Loopback May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 6 Data Port Physical Options 2 of 2 Monitor DTR Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies the conditions on the data port that determine when valid data is not being sent from the DTE When this condition is detected all ones are sent to the network on the DSO channels allocated to the port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Synchronous Data and Port Type is not set to X 21 Enable Interchange circuit CD ITU 108 1 2 DTR is monitored to determine when valid data is sent from the DTE When DTR is off all ones are sent to the network Disable DTR is not monitored DTR is assumed to be asserted and data is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead Monitor RTS Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies the conditions on the data port that determine when valid data is not being sent from the DTE When this condition is d
216. ity has been set up main Access Level 1 PARADYNE 9124 Device Name Node A 04 26 1999 23 32 MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Ctrl a to access these functions Select To Status View diagnostic tests interfaces PVC connections and statistics Also to display LEDs and FrameSaver unit identity information Test Select and cancel test for the FrameSaver unit s interfaces Configuration Display and edit the configuration options Auto Configuration Configure basic access unit setup automatically based upon a selected application Automatically populate network and data port DLCI configuration options with numeric settings Control Control the async user interface for call directories device naming login administration and selecting software releases Also to initiate a power on reset of the FrameSaver unit See Appendix A Menu Hierarchy for a pictorial view of the menu hierarchy which represents the organization of the FrameSaver units menus and screens May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 User Interface and Basic Operation Screen Elements There are two user work areas Screen area Where you input information into fields Function keys area Where you perform specific screen functions Below is a sample configuration screen Model Number Menu Path Date and Time main config port physical Company Name 9x24 Device Name Node A 01
217. ity through the use of community names There are three methods for limiting SNMP access Disabling SNMP access Assigning SNMP community names and access type Assigning IP addresses of NMSs that can access the FrameSaver unit Disabling SNMP Access The General SNMP Options screen provides the configuration option to disable SNMP access to the unit When this configuration option is disabled the FrameSaver unit will not respond to any SNMP messages B gt Procedure To disable SNMP access 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management The General SNMP Options screen appears 2 Set SNMP Management to Disable 3 Save your changes See Configuring SNMP Management in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for more information about General SNMP Management configuration options 9 6 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Security and Logins Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels The General SNMP Options screen provides the configuration options that allow the FrameSaver unit to be managed by an SNMP manager supporting the SNMP protocol Use this screen to Assign the SNMP community names that are allowed to access the FrameSaver units Management Information Base MIB m Specify the type of access allowed for each SNMP community name Whenever an external SNMP manager attempts to access an object in the MIB the comm
218. ived on DLCls that are not configured pass transparently through the unit between the network interface and the first data port without monitoring of DLCI traffic or demultiplexing multiplexing management diagnostics or user data Data received on DLCls that are not configured on other frame relay links is discarded Table 10 8 Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status Field Status What It Indicates DLCI 16 through 1007 Identifies the Local Management Interface reported DLC numbers assigned to the selected interface the identifying number assigned to the path between two frame relay FrameSaver units ports DLCI statuses are listed in ascending order i e lowest number first Active Inactive Deleted 1 New Status LMl reported status of the DLCI Whether the DLCI is active capable of carrying data in the frame relay network Whether it is inactive Whether it has been deleted by the frame relay network or Whether it has been created by the frame relay network 0 1536000 Displays the committed information rate reported by the Stratacom switch CIR information only appears in this column when LMI Protocol is set to Standard If blank the switch does not support this feature 1 Appears for 10 seconds only before the network changes Deleted to Inactive and New to Active May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance PVC Connection Status PVC c
219. ivity methods Examples illustrating various network configurations are included in each section 9124 A2 GH30 00 Customer End User Management Overview on page 2 2 Service Provider Management Overview on page 2 3 Managing the FrameSaver Unit on page 2 4 Configuring Local Management Control on page 2 4 Configuring End to End Management Control on page 2 7 May 1999 Preliminary 2 1 Management Control Customer End User Management Overview The optimal method for managing an end user network is shown in the example below Using this method saves PVC charges because management data is multiplexed with customer data using a single PVC By accessing the remote units in band the remote units are not router dependent so trouble isolation is easier when there are LAN outages Customer M Standard Local PVC Frame Relay PVCs Containing Network Multiplexed Management EDLCls and Customer Data Relay FrameSaver Router 9124 Unit Customer Customer Branch 1 Branch 2 Frame Relay FrameSaver Router 9124 9124 98 15870 Unit Unit Physical Connection PVC Connection Using EDLCIs nooseaee PVC Connection Using Standard DLCls For details configuring in band management links to the central and remote site FrameSaver units see Configuring Management PVCs in Chapter 8 Configuration Options 2 2 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Management Control Service Prov
220. k C 18 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area These alarms apply to DLCls on the network interface They are created either during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created and put into the Paradyne defined alarm area Table D 4 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area Rising Falling Threshold Threshold MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Default Default DLCI Inactive MIB devfrext mib E 900 secs meconds Tag deverexticiSisinactive Secs Missing Latency MIB devfrext mib E 900 secs Pespolewe Tag devFrExiDiciMissedsLva gt OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 1 D Rx FECNs MIB FT DTE MIB RFC 2115 60 secs Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs an OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FT DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Congested Seconds MIB devfrext mib E 60 secs Tag devFrExtDIciSts enn CongestedSecs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 6 1 D Frames Dropped by D MIB devfrext mib E 900 secs h ii Tag frFrExtDlciNetDropFr a S OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI num
221. k LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the interface For the network DSX or ISDN PRI DBM interface an LOS condition is declared when 175 consecutive zeros are received For the DSX 1 interface there may be a cable problem or the DTE may not be transmitting a signal LOS at DSX 1 11 6 May 1999 Preliminary 1 If LMI was never up Verify that the proper time slots have been configured Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used 2 Verify that Frame Relay Performance Statistics show LMI frames being transmitted If all of the above have been verified and the physical link is not in Alarm contact your network provider For User Data Port 1 Check that the DTE cable is securely attached at both ends Verify that Transmit Clock Source and Invert Transmit Clock options are properly configured Verify that Frame Relay Performance Statistics show LMI frames being received If no frames are being received Check the attached device Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used For the network DSX 1 or ISDN PRI DBM interface 1 Check that the cable is securely attached at both ends Verify that the attached device is operational Contact your network provider 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting Table 11 1 Alarm Conditions 3 of 4
222. kFailClear 104 currently configured that the secondary clock source secondary clock source has is operational again cleared 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary C 7 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table C 5 enterprise Specific Traps 2 of 2 Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause enterpriseSelfTest Fail 2 enterprise Test Start 5 enterprise Test Stop 105 A hardware failure A test is running Unit has completed re initialization and a hardware failure was detected At least one test has been started on an interface or virtual circuit All tests have been halted All tests have been halted on an interface or virtual circuit The following variable bindings support the enterprise Specific traps and conditions for each interface Table C 6 enterprise Specific Variable Bindings 1 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause LMI Protocol is set to Standard and the network s CIR changed enterpriseCIR Change 115 enterpriseConfig Change 6 enterpriseDevice Fail 3 C 8 devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib devFrExtDiciDlci devFrExt mib devFrExtDiciCIR devFrExt mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib is the internal failure number May 1999 Preliminary String CIR on ifString changed to CIR bps Configuration has b
223. kUp and linkDown Traps Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause linkDown A failure in one of the A failure in one of the communication interfaces communication interfaces has has occurred occurred linkUp One of the failed One of the failed communication communication interfaces is interfaces is up and operational up and operational C 4 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults The following variable bindings support the linkUp and linkDown traps Table C 4 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 1 of 2 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Physical Sublayer Represented by the entry in the MIB II Interfaces Table Network m iflndex RFC 1573 a linkDown One or more alarm DSX 1 conditions are active on the m ifAdminStatus interface Fea cade at eens Alarm onions include media specific DS1 i MIB ifOperStatus RFC 1573 _ Loss of Signal LOS or devLastTrapString far end loss of signal devHealthAndStatus Out of Frame OOF mib Alarm Indication Signal AIS Excessive Error Rate EER Yellow Alarm Loopback Strings ifString down No alarms exist E g Network T1 down due to loopback SifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown a linkUp No alarms on the interface String SifString up u linkDown One or
224. l Modem Commands is set to AT a s only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication lonk Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 8 17 Communication Port Options 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the COM port which you Can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 May 1999 Preliminary 8 77 Configuration Control Characters Sequence ASCII Hex A ora SOH 0x01 B or b STX 0x02 NG or C ETX 0x03 D or d EOT 0x04 E or e ENQ 0x05 AF or f 0x06 LF or NL wow o w Q or q DC1 0x11 R or r DC2 0x12 S or s DC3 0x13 AT OF ey DC4 0x14 U or u NAK 0x15 AV or y SYN 0x16 AW or w ETB 0x17 AX Or x CAN 0x18 8 78 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 79 Security and Logins This chapter provides information about the following Limiting Access 9124 A2 GH30 00 Limiting Access see below Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access on page 9 2 Controlling Telnet or FTP Access on page 9 3 Limiting Telnet Access on page 9 3 Limiting FTP Access on page 9 4 Limiting Telnet orFTP Access Over the TS Man
225. l domains Hosts H Level 3 information Enabled for IP domain only network Disabled for all other domains Conversations C Protocols being used Disabled for all domains Logging Event logging Disabled for all domains and groups 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to apply the changes Refer to Configuring Domains in Properties Files in Chapter 5 of the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information May 1999 Preliminary 6 7 Using NetScout Manager Plus Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template Once DLCls have been discovered SLV alarms should be configured and assigned to each DLCI Paradyne provides a template for configuring alarms DLCI alarms can be configured manually but using the Paradyne alarm defaults template greatly reduces configuration time The following alarms are configured for each DLCI included in the Paradyne MIB Frames Sent SLVFramesSnt Rx DLC Utilization SLVrxDLCIUtil Tx CIR Utilization SLVTxCIRUtil Frames Sent Above CIR SLVFramesTxAbvClIR Tx DLCI Utilization SLVTxDLCIUtil Average Latency AverageLatency Frames Received SLVFramesRec Current Latency CurrentLatency These alarms and current values can be found in NSHOME usr slvtemplate fct which is used as a Starting point for loading new alarms This file can be copied and edited so the alarm threshold values match service level agreeme
226. lated Documents cece eee eee eee eee About the FrameSaver SLV OVEIVICW serenan Arer SEEE nese eee eee eee eeaes FrameSaver SLV Features 0 ccc tenes The OpenLane Management Solution 0 cece eee OpenLane DCE Manager nna c cece cece eee eee eee OpenLane Performance Wizard 0 0c cece eee ee eens m NetScout Manager PluS 0 00 ccc eee NetScout Probes sb acximcase recsh ends Hee ehh ecu eae n cadue see Management Control Customer End User Management Overview 0000 cease Service Provider Management Overview 0ce eee eens Managing the FrameSaver Unit 0 ccc eee nes Configuring Local Management Control 0 anaana nanana Creating a Management DLC Between the Router and Unit Via He DIE FOU go ceca 12 a aro ey re ates ewe ee Are Segre Been aw es ee sae Creating a Separate Management Link Via the COM Port Configuring End to End Management Control 0000 Management Control Using PVC Multiplexing EDLCI Management Control Using a Dedicated DLCI Transparent Remote Management Control Using RPO 1490 ROUTES eases acudeadedentude ieee nee hs eee eee news 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary Contents 3 Typical Applications m SLV Frame Relay ACCESS 0 ccc cee eee 3 1 m Mixing FrameSaver Units in Applications 0 0 0 e eee eee 3 4 Using All F
227. le DLC in IFLG Khe Frera Beles iL uipa H eda Explnation of Exceptions Detail Li Dalio Tabari BLEI L928 Khe Feum Falrr Taal Merhar of Eacapacer 2 Told Sscaction Para dt a z ae a a a E an 1 libit Health ieee F hiria dalai md te a a iE g H ibe Ehhh m kiah ed Jj Largai Ta Dallase MLCI LEE Kibo Frase JA hua oe CH Fur Livy Thai Hinta of Exec l Toh Ekaan Porat 29 7 Leaing eceptmrs Peia Lieb Hin Hah Ire a27 Beare F ad Pe Fergani lf a DLCI suddenly shows up on these reports check whether any new equipment has been added to the network and whether it is properly configured If its configuration is correct the equipment could be faulty 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 7 9 Concord s Network Health Network Summary Report This set of charts and the table provides a summary of the frame relay network Use this report for planning and to predict when a DLCI might run into problems 7 10 HER be 2 T tal Talal Metwork ios bey ik The Aera Heal ch Deke bey uy ated os tas A ak by fe ore i Pamah S hima Tolg bL LN T oai Aimi sla LTAT o kimi Lars LIA To Sein foo Pers Career oped Ta ier Reh E Chara age LT Tah Pica ppn Praa Chara Tiap DL Ta CF Cka TT TAF LC IL eT aul 1 ee Emdi a wie Cagak apn hers May 1999 Preliminary gen eo Pet Therese Mea LE Hina Bees ee Cs bit Ba PP be LT Hi ats vai vata
228. lect a report from the drop down list In the Subject section select WAN from the drop down list From the drop down list next to Group select the newly created group In the Time Range section specify the day to be included on the report In the Output section select either the Screen or Printer radio button A check mark will appear in the selected box Select the OK button to run the selected report The Generating Report window opens showing the report s progress The window closes when the report screen comes up or the report is printed See Running Reports from the Console in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information It also tells you how to schedule automatic report generation 7 6 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Concord s Network Health Viewing Network Health Charts and Tables 9124 A2 GH30 00 Network Health already supports the service level verifier capability provided by NetScout probes FrameSaver SLVs The following frame relay reports support frame relay and FrameSaver SLV products Exceptions Reports Summary Reports Network Summary Report m Leaders Summary Report m Elements Summary Report Supplemental Report Service Level Reports m Executive Service Level Report m T Manager Service Level Report Customer Service Level Report At a Glance Reports At a Glance Report m Paradyne SLV Plus At a Glance Report Provide summary and detail inf
229. lems Displaying LEDs and Control Leads and LED Descriptions in Chapter 10 Operation and Maintenance for faceplate LEDs their description as well as the user interface screen Main Menu Status gt Display LEDs and Control LEDs Health and Status Alarms on page 11 5 and Health and Status Messages in Chapter 10 Operation and Maintenance Main Menu gt Status System and Test Status Messages also appear at the bottom of any menu driven user interface screen Performance statistics Performance Statistics in Chapter 10 Operation and Maintenance to help you determine how long a problem has existed Alarm conditions that will Alarms on page 11 5 generate an SNMP trap SNMP traps Appendix C SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Alarm system relay for units Setting General System Optionss in Chapter 8 installed in a 5 slot housing Configuration to enable this feature Main Menu gt Configuration gt System General 11 2 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Resetting the Unit Troubleshooting You can reset the unit in one of four ways Reset it from the Control menu Cycle the power Reset the configuration options for the COM port or reload the factory default settings Set the appropriate MIB object from NMS see your NMS documentation The unit performs a self test when it is reset Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu Use this procedure to initiate a powe
230. lls the phone number contained in the Control menu s Modem Call Directories Directory Number A Alarm Disable For traps where the COM port connected external device has not completed the connection holds the messages Trap Disconnect Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the modem disconnects after the SNMP trap message has been sent This configuration option only applies to external device connections initiated as a result of sending the SNMP trap message Enable Disconnects the call after sending an SNMP trap message s Disable Does not disconnect the call and holds the line until it is disconnected manually or by the remote modem This allows the NMS to poll the FrameSaver unit for more information after receiving an SNMP trap May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 4 of 4 Call Retry Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether an incomplete call busy no answer etc is retried when an SNMP trap message is sent to the COM port connected external device Enable Attempts to retry the call up to one time per SNMP trap message with a delay between the retry The delay is specified by the Dial Out Delay Time Min configuration option called first If the call cannot be completed then the alternate directory s telephone
231. local and remote loopbacks and send monitor pattern tests For voice APMs test tones and force monitor DLCI tests PVC loopback send monior pattern and connectivity All Signaling are also provided IP PING and Self test These tests can be commanded from the system s menu driven user interface OpenLane Performance Wizard s Diagnostic Wizard and OpenLane DCE Manager using SNMP MIB test commands The IP PING and self test cannot be run using DCE Manager May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 About the FrameSaver SLV Dedicated Troubleshooting PVC Provides a troubleshooting management link that helps service providers isolate problems within their network This feature can be configured LMI Packet Capture Provides a way to upload data that has been captured in a trace file so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for analysis Security Provides multiple levels of security to prevent unauthorized access to the system which include requiring logins disabling a remote access method specifying community names and access types and authorizing NMS IP addresses and access type Router Independence Unique diagnostics performance monitoring PVC based in band network management and SNMP connectivity is not dependent upon external routers cables or LAN adapters Inverse ARP and Standard RIP Support Provides Inverse ARP Address Resolution Protocol support s
232. lot of the DSX 1 Interface The bottom field represents the cross connect status of the associated top field DSX 1 time slot The following information is available for viewing The DSX 1 Time Slot Fields top Indicate D01 to D24 The DSX 1 Interface time slot 01 to 24 The Cross Connect Status Field bottom Indicates the Network Interface n 1 or 2 time slot yy is assigned to DSX 1 time slot 01 to 24 using Clear Channel Network Interface n 1 or 2 time slot yy is assigned to DSX 1 time slot 01 to 24 using Robbed Bit Signaling r FrameSaver physical slot assignment information appears below the DSX 1 interface time slot fields The following information is available for viewing Physical Slot Identifies the assigned card type 01 to 14 based on model T1 NAM T1 NAM Empty The slot is empty May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance Performance Statistics Use the Performance Statistics menu to display statistical information for a selected interface Statistical information is useful when trying to determine the severity and frequency or duration of a condition Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics The following performance statistics are collected m Service Level Verification Performance Statistics on page 10 27 DLCI Performance Statistics on page 10 28 Frame Relay Performance Statistics on page 10 30 m ESF Line
233. lysis and monitoring functions NetScout Manager Plus provides the following features for FrameSaver SLV units Configurable thresholds for RMON 1 alarms and events m Performance monitoring using collected RMON 2 data Protocol Directory and Distribution functionality allows FrameSaver SLV units to measure up to eleven network layer protocols and report the amount of traffic generated by each IP Top Talkers and Listeners reporting identifies the devices using network bandwidth The network s top six users are identified User history buckets to collect performance statistics from FrameSaver SLV units Up to 900 samples can be stored in 15 minute buckets with 96 buckets in a 24 hour period for up to five days worth of data NetScout Probes Optional standalone NetScout Probes can be used at sites where full 7 layer monitoring an unlimited number of protocols and advanced frame capture and decode capabilities are desired 1 8 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Management Control This chapter contains customer end user and service provider management overviews followed by the steps needed to provide local and remote management connectivity to the FrameSaver unit You need to select and configure A method of local management connectivity for FrameSaver units A method for end to end management connectivity across the network An IP addressing scheme that fits the local and end to end management connect
234. m a remote terminal via a modem or Telnet connection f managing the FrameSaver unit using an SNMP NMS or Telnet select an IP addressing scheme See Chapter 2 Management Control for different management alternatives See Appendix B P Addressing for sample IP addressing schemes Plan your T1 timeslot assignments if applicable Selecting a Management Interface 8 4 Select one of the following management interfaces Asynchronous terminal access to the menu driven user interface Over the FrameSaver unit s COM port or modem connection for local configuration and control An asynchronous terminal is required for initial setup to enable external management Telnet access to the menu driven user interface Over the FrameSaver unit s COM port through an in band management channel PVC or over the COM port using a LAN adapter SNMP Over the FrameSaver units COM port using a modem over the network interface or a DIE port using an in band management channel PVC or over the COM port using a LAN adapter May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units At a minimum the following configuration options must be set before deploying a a FrameSaver unit to a remote site m Node IP Address m Node Subnet Mask See Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for these options Entering and Displaying System Information
235. m alarmindex RFC 1757 Object being monitored has risen above the set threshold alarmVariable RFC 1757 String arm ao ETDE Change in variableName RFC Eks yp typeString threshold of alarmRisingThreshold by alarmValue RFC 1757 alarmValue Sp AlarmRising Threshold alarmRising Threshold E g Octets received on RFC 1757 Network T1 frame relay rose devLastTrapString to threshold of 1 devHealthAndStatus mib fallingAlarm alarmiIndex RFC 1757 Object being monitored has fallen below the set threshold alarmVariable RFC 1757 String Change in variableName typeString threshold of alarmFallingThreshold by alarmValue RFC 1757 alarmValue AlarmFalling Threshold alarmFalling Threshold E g Octets received on RFC 1757 Network T1 frame relay fell devLastTrapString to threshold of 1 devHealthAndStatus mib alarmSampleType RFC 1757 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary C 13 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults RMON Alarm and Event Defaults Event Defaults The NextEDGE unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap or a log event is sent Since all events sent are under the control of the NextEDGE unit there is no need to define multiple events for each alarm type so only the following tw
236. method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers for the COM port A parity bit is added to the data to make the 1 bits of each character add up to either an odd or even number Each character of transmitted data is approved as error free if the 1 bits add up to an odd or even number as specified by this configuration option None Provides no parity Even Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always even Odd Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always odd May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 17 Communication Port Options 2 of 4 Stop Bits Possible Settings 1 2 Default Setting 1 Determines the number of stop bits used for the COM port 1 Provides one stop bit 2 Provides two stop bits Ignore Control Leads Possible Settings Disable DTR Default Setting Disable Specifies whether DTR is used Disable Treats control leads as standard operation DTR Ignores DTR This may be necessary when connecting to some PAD devices Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user ID and password referred to as the login is required in order to log on to the asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Requires a logi
237. more alarm conditions are active on the Synchronous Data Port m iflndex RFC 1573 m ifAdminStatus S d by th epee ee ek conditions include Pe A j ifOperStatus RFC 1573 _ prp RS232 like MIB devLastTrapString RTS 2 devHealthAndStatus Not DTR or RTS but mib link is down String ifString alarmString down E g Sync Data Port SO1P1 DTR and RTS down a linkKUp No alarms on the port String SifString up 1 The DTR alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the DTR lead state 2 The RTS alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the RTS lead state May 1999 Preliminary C 5 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table C 4 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 2 of 2 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Logical Link Sublayer Represented by the entry in the MIB II Interfaces Table Synchronous Data Port Service Side of the Frame Relay UNI Supported by the media specific Frame Relay Services MIB Network DTE Side of the Frame Relay UNI Supported by the media specific Frame Relay DTE s MIB iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib ifIndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndS
238. mp Test stops when the test duration expires See Configuring General System Options in Chapter 8 Configuration Options to configure the unit to stop the test automatically lf verifying LEDs remotely Telnet into the unit s menu driven user interface and view the Display LEDs and Control Leads screen Main Menu Status Display LEDs and Control Leads B gt Procedure To perform a Lamp Test from DCE Manager take the folllowing path DCE Manager Device Display Diagnosis menu gt Lamp Test Start The LEDs on the unit start blinking Once the device is located and the LEDs verified select Lamp Test Stop The unit LEDs return to normal operation B gt Procedure To perform a Lamp Test from Performance Wizard 1 Click on the Tests button from Navigation Wizard 2 Highlight the unit to be tested 3 Click on the Device Tests menu and select Start Lamp Test 4 To stop the test select Stop Lamp Test from the Device Tests menu 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 11 27 Troubleshooting LMI Packet Utility A packet capture utility is provided to aid with problem isolation when LMI errors are detected Using this utility any enabled frame relay link that is having problems can be selected The utility captures any LMI packets sent or received and writes them to a data file called Imitrace syc in the system s data directory B gt Procedure To use the utility 1 Select an enabled frame relay link 2 Star
239. mplete appears at the bottom of the screen The number of login pages records reflects one less record and the record before the deleted record reappears Example Page 2 of 4 is changed to Page 2 of 3 9 12 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance 9124 A2 GH30 00 This chapter includes the following information Displaying System Information on page 10 2 Displaying LEDs and Control Leads on page 10 3 Device Messages on page 10 6 Status Information on page 10 11 Self Test Results Messages on page 10 12 Health and Status Messages on page 10 13 Test Status Messages on page 10 18 Network LMI Reported DLClIs Status on page 10 20 PVC Connection Status on page 10 21 Time Slot Assignment Status on page 10 22 Time Slot Assignment Status on page 10 22 Performance Statistics on page 10 25 Clearing Performance Statistics on page 10 26 Determining Whether a Statistic is Incrementing on page 10 26 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics on page 10 27 DLCI Performance Statistics on page 10 28 Frame Relay Performance Statistics on page 10 30 ESF Line Performance Statistics on page 10 33 FTP File Transfers on page 10 36 Upgrading System Software on page 10 38 Determining Whether a Download is Completed on page 10 39 May 1999 Preliminary 10 1 Operation and Maintenance Changing Software on page 10 39 Tr
240. mpting to communicate with the unit Make sure that SNMP Management is set to Enable Menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management SNMP Management Enable See Configuring SNMP Management in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for more information about SNMP management configuration options 9 8 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Security and Logins B gt Procedure To limit SNMP access through IP addresses 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP NMS Security The SNMP NMS Security Options screen appears 2 Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate Set the configuration option Enable IP address checking NMS IP Validation to Enable Specify the number between 1 Number of Managers to the desired and 10 of SNMP management number systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit Specify the IP address es that NMS n IP Address to the appropriate identifies the SNMP manager s IP address authorized to send SNMP messages to the unit Specify the access allowed for an Access Level to Read or Read Write authorized NMS when IP address validates is performed 3 Save your changes See Configuring SNMP NMS Security in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for more information about SNMP NMS S
241. n Corc ClrStats Clear network performance statistics and refresh the screen Variations include a CirSLV amp DLClStats for clearing SLV and DLCI Statistics a ClrLinkStats for clearing frame relay link statistics ClilrDBMStats for clearing DBM call statistics Uoru PgUp Display the previous page Dord PgDn Display the next page Norn NextDLCl Display the next DLCI ane or f ClrFarStats Reset far end ESF line statistics and refresh the screen Porp ClrNearStats Reset near end ESF line statistics and refresh the screen The following sections provide examples that show you how to m Select from a menu page 4 8 m Switching between screen areas page 4 8 m Select a field page 4 9 m Enter information see page 4 9 May 1999 Preliminary 4 7 User Interface and Basic Operation Selecting from a Menu B gt Procedure To select from a menu 1 Tab or press the down arrow key to position the cursor on a menu selection or press the up arrow key to move the cursor to the bottom of the menu list Each menu selection is highlighted as you press the key to move the cursor from position to position 2 Press Return The selected menu or screen appears B gt Procedure To return to a previous screen use either of the following methods m Press the Escape Esc key until you reach the desired screen Switch to the function keys area of the screen and select MainMenu Switching Between Scr
242. n if it is not currently running Check the lower right corner of the Device Explorer window to see whether Historical Daemon is running see the example on page 5 3 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 5 5 Using the OpenLane NMS Accessing NetScout Manager Plus A direct link to the NetScout Manager Plus application is provided by OpenLane Performance Wizard Use this feature to launch NetScout reports B gt Procedure To access the NetScout Manager Plus main window 1 Select Start NetScout Manager from the Action menu The NetScout Manager Plus main window appears 2 Select the FrameRelay radio button from the agent type selection bar on the left side of the window File w Agent AgentGroup w Switch FrameRelay Applicable icons appear on the right side of the main window Teri ipn Leas fir Eirig BE iiniu T1 Refer to Launching NSM in Chapter 3 of the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for information about how to start reports 5 6 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Using the OpenLane NMS Creating PVC Connections Port 1 PVC definitions need to be created between two endpoints in the network Network PVCs were automatically created when the unit is discovered B gt Procedure To create PVC definitions 1 From Device Explorer select a device s DLCI so it is highlighted 2 Click the right mouse button and select Connection from the menu The Edit Con
243. n ready so you can access licensed applications To use this application 1 Install the Concord Network Health software and open the application 2 Enter license information from the Network Health License Information form so specific Network Health applications can be used 3 Discover network elements devices and interfaces in the network see page 7 3 4 Configure the Network Health applications then save them see page 7 4 5 Organize elements into groups for reporting purposes See page 7 5 6 Setup and run reports see page 7 6 Setup and operation information is contained in the Network Health User Guide The sections that follow address only the minimal procedural steps needed once you have access to the applications See the Network Health User and Reports Guides for additional startup information and a full discussion of the application s features and how to use them 7 2 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Concord s Network Health Discovering FrameSaver Elements Once licenses are entered to provide access to the applications the Discover dialog box opens Use this dialog box to search for SLV units in your network and discover their DLCls Saving the results creates definitions in the Poller Configuration which are used to poll the units IP addresses and the Community String Community Names in the FrameSaver unit must be entered for Network Health to find the SLV units on the network and dis
244. n to access the menu driven user interface Disable Does not requires a login Port Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies level of user access privilege for an asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port If a login is required for the port the effective access level is determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the port or the user For example if the Port Access Level assigned is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only level 3 access will be permitted for the port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Level 1 Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring diagnostics and configuration The user can add change and display configuration options and perform device testing CAUTION Before changing the communication port s access level to Level 2 or 3 make sure that the Telnet Session Access Level is set top Level 1 and at least one Login ID is set to Level 1 Otherwise access will be lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the configuration process again Level 2 Allows limited access and control of the device The user can monitor and perform diagnostics display sta
245. nable LLB is controlled by LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands Receiving a LLB Actuate command causes the FrameSaver unit to enter a line loopback provided an LLB can be performed in the FrameSaver unit s current state Receiving an LLB Release command terminates the LLB Disable The FrameSaver unit ignores the LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the FrameSaver unit is not in compliance with ANSI T1 403 or AT amp T TR 62411 May 1999 Preliminary 8 29 Configuration 8 30 Table 8 4 T1 Network Physical Options 3 of 4 Network Initiated PLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the payload loopback PLB to be controlled by the receipt of PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands from the network Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable PLB is controlled by PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands Receiving a PLB Actuate command causes the FrameSaver unit to enter a payload loopback provided a PLB can be performed in the FrameSaver unit s current state Receiving a PLB Release command terminates the PLB Disable The FrameSaver unit ignores the PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the unit is not in compliance with ANSI T1 403 or AT amp T TR 54016 ANSI Performance Report Messages Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting
246. nables you to define the signaling assignments and trunk conditioning for each time slot on the DSX 1 interface You can specify whether robbed bit signaling information is being passed within a given DSO and the value of the signaling bits that will be transmitted for that DSO to the other cross connected T1 interface if a Carrier Group Alarm CGA occurs on a T1 interface Only those DSX 1 to Network assignments from page 1 are displayed on this page from left to right and top to bottom in ascending order by network and time slot When a CGA condition LOS OOF or AIS is declared for a T1 interface the signaling bits being transmitted to the other T1 interface for the DSO are forced to idle for two seconds except for user defined patterns which are transmitted immediately This drops any call in progress The signaling bits are then forced to the selected state Busy or Idle and remain in this state until the CGA condition clears At this point the received signaling bits from the T1 interface which formerly had the CGA condition are passed through to the other T1 interface NOTE Trunk conditioning will only occur on DSOs that are cross connected to another T1 interface All other DSOs remain unaffected by trunk conditioning Enter one of the values shown in Table 8 7 in each of the fields on both the Network side and the DSX 1 side Although you can choose any value for the DSX 1 side the default value displayed is based on a ty
247. nd Stopping a Test on page 11 15 B gt Procedure To abort all tests on all interfaces 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test 2 Select Abort All Tests and press Enter Command Complete appears when all tests on all interfaces have been stopped NOTE Abort All Tests does not interrupt DTE initiated loopbacks Determining Test Status and Results Current test status and results are available on the Test screen from which you execute the test Results column System and Test Status screen NMS Test LED PVC Tests PVC tests can be run on a requested DLCI for a selected interface m When PVC tests are on a multiplexed DLCI between FrameSaver units they are nondisruptive to data so user data can continue to be sent during a test m lf the device at one end of the circuit is not a FrameSaver unit PVC tests are on a standard DLCI and are disruptive to data Loopback and send monitor pattern tests are available for each interface on the selected DLCI Units should be at each end of the circuit If a PVC Loopback is started at one end of the circuit the other end can send and monitor pattern tests NOTE Errors encountered during these tests may be caused by mismatched CIRs in the two FrameSaver units If errors are detected verify the CIR configuration and retest 11 16 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 PVC Loopback 9124 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting The PVC Loopback
248. ne NMS Setting Up for Collection of Historical Data See the sample Device Explorer window on page 5 3 OK appears under the Historical Collection column In this example historical data is being collected for performance statistics on the T1 or Network Port interface of the 135 90 153 3 device B gt Procedure To specify collection of historical data 1 Select an interface or PVC so it is highlighted 2 Click the right mouse button and select Historical Collection from the menu The following dialog box opens Edit Historical Collection Daemon Is Active Device 135 90 153 3 Interface T1 on Network Port View Frequency Units Active Status FR decess Channel Aggregated Summary E minutels E OK Frame Relay Physical Link Integrity minutes a O51 Physical Link Diagnostics 15 minutets O OK Cancel Help 3 Change the frequency of samples to be taken and the unit of time to be used for each of the graphical views 4 Click on the Active box for the graphical views wanted so a checkmark appears in the box 5 Select the Test button to verify that the data collection parameters are correct OK should appear in the message area 6 Select the OK button The Edit Historical Collection dialog box closes and an OK appears under the Historical Collection column for the interface or PVC selected and for the device 7 Click on Action at the menu bar and select Start Historical Daemo
249. nection dialog box opens with the network collapsed 3 Expand the remote network device in the device display area so that its DLCls are shown Edit Connection Device 135 90 153 3 Interface Frame Relay on Data Port 1 BLE OLCI 153 Ft i Frame Relay on Data Port 1 OLCI 100 c OLCI 153 DLC 253 W COM Port WTI on Network Port W Frame Relay on Network Port W Frame Relay on Data Port 1 a 135 90 153 4 W COM Port WTI on Network Port W Frame Relay on Network Port L DLC 120 W Frame Relay on Data Port 1 re DLC 120 gt DLL 253 W COM Port eon Mame oici 153 puc 253 Connect Disconnect Cancel Help 4 Select the appropriate DLCI so it is highlighted The selected DLCI numbers appear in the Connection Name field for both ends of the connection which can be edited for a more meaningful name 5 Select the Connect button The Edit Connection dialog box closes and the PVC appears under the Connection column for the devices at both ends of the connection Repeat the procedure until all Port 1 DLC connections have been defined 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 5 7 Using the OpenLane NMS Setting Frame and Burst Ranges You can configure frame size and burst upper limits to Match service level agreement parameters Identify problem areas Display the Frame Burst Breakdown graph Assist in troubleshooting Match the site s traffic patterns B gt Procedure To set frame and
250. nfigured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link see Table 8 17 Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the COM port which you Can view or edit Clear Clears the IP address for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the IP Address is all zeros the COM port uses the Node IP Address if one has been configured Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit Only in effect wnen the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link see Table 8 17 Communication Port Options Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the COM port which you Can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 17 Communication Port Options 4 of 4 Link Protocol Possible Settings PPP SLIP Default Set
251. ng access through a FTP session Disabling FTP access completely m Requiring a user ID or password to login Bandwidth of FTP B gt Procedure To limit FTP access when the session is not on the TS Management Link 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate Set the configuration option Disable FTP FTP Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login on page 9 11 If you want to allow users to configure the unit or perform file transfers including downloads keep the access at Level 1 Level 1 access is required to download software to the unit or to upload or download configuration files Level 3 is sufficient for NMS access for SLV historical information Limit bandwidth for FTP FTP Max Receive Rate to a rate less than the network line speed typically less than or equal to the CIR This method is not recommended if SLV reports are desired since FTP is required to generate the reports 3 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for more information about setting FTP options 9 4 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Security and Logins Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS
252. nt systems See the sections that follow to make sure you have the necessary hardware and software to support this application For the latest hardware requirements see the NetScout Manager Plus Set Up amp Installation Guide For the latest software requirements see the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide May 1999 Preliminary 6 1 Using NetScout Manager Plus Using a NetScout Manager Plus NMS Application For additional information about accessing and managing the FrameSaver SLV unit through NetScout Manager Plus refer to the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide to help you install the application monitor traffic and diagnose emerging problems on network segments m NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide to help you configure agents remote servers and report templates using the various NetScout products NetScout Probe User Guide to help you install and configure NetScout Probe on network segments you want to monitor as shown in SLV Frame Relay Access in Chapter 3 Typical Applications Installing NetScout Manager Plus Installation instructions are located in Chapter 2 of the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide Depending upon your platform see either m nstalling NSS NSM NSM Unix Version m nstalling NSS NSM NSM Windows Version May 1999 Preliminary Using NetScout Manager Plus Configuring NetScout Manager Plus For the
253. nt values The copied fct file can then be used to replicate alarm threshold values for all DLCls on the unit using the eztrap utility All fct files must be in NSHOME usr To configure alarms manually see Adding SLV Alarms Manually on page 6 11 NOTE Perl must be installed in your system to use the eztrap utility in the procedure below If you have an NT system please install Perl before proceeding B gt Procedure 1 Open a terminal window and go to NSHOME usr 2 Type eztrap i filename fct o agenitname fct agentname and press Enter to run the eztrap utility to create alarm threshold values across all DLCls for the copied fct file The message eztrap done appears when the fct file is transferred 3 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window see the window on page 6 5 4 Edit any alarm values that need to be changed 5 Select the Install button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window to load alarms for the unit This may take some time so please be patient See Editing Alarms on page 6 9 if any default settings need to be changed 6 8 May 1999 Preliminary Using NetScout Manager Plus Editing Alarms B gt Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manag
254. nterconnected IP network and the access security applicable to the session see Table 8 14 Two Telnet sessions can be active at a time Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Session Table 8 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options 1 of 3 Telnet Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the FrameSaver unit will respond to a session request from a Telnet client on an interconnected IP network Enable Allows Telnet sessions between the FrameSaver unit and Telnet client Disable Does not allow Telnet sessions Telnet Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a user ID and password referred to as the login are required to access the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If required the login used Is the same login used for an menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Management Link Enable Requires a login to access a Telnet session Disable Does not require a login May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options 2 of 3 Session Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest security level allowed when accessing the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If a
255. nterface mee transmits discards and transmit overruns Tx Total Discards Total number of transmit discards on the interface including underrun flushes Tx CTS Lost Events Number of times CTS has been lost lowered Tx Underruns Number of transmitter underruns too few bits on the interface 1 Does not appear when Port Type is set to X 21 see Port Type option in Table 9 6 Data Ports Physical Options ESF Line Performance Statistics 9124 A2 GH30 00 These statistics appear when ESF Line is selected from the Performance Statistics menu for the network interface Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics ESF Line Only seven intervals appear on the screen at any one time You can choose which intervals to display on your screen by entering m Interval Number 01 96 Time Hours and Minutes NOTES Interval 01 is the interval occurring just prior to the current one Interval 02 is 2 intervals prior to the current one etc Selecting a specific time is useful when the approximate time at which a specific event occurred is known Edit any of the interval or time fields on lines 10 13 or 16 When Enter is pressed the values change to the selected range To select intervals You must enter an interval or time on Occurring on and before a__ Line 10 The display will include the selected interval plus selected interval or time the 6 intervals recorded before it Bracketing a selected Line 13 The
256. ntly active you can manually assign time slots on the Network interface for Frame Relay traffic using the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen This screen is read only when Time Slot Discovery is set to Enable for the Network interface Value Meaning Time Slot Specifies whether the time slots used for frame relay traffic should Discovery be discovered from the Network interface upon detection of LMI failure This option allows additional time slots to be added without manual device reconfiguration This field represents time slot xx of the selected Network interface Assigned The time slot is already assigned to something other than Frame Relay so it is unavailable Assigned time slots cannot be modified from this screen Available The time slot is currently unassigned FrameRly1 Time slot ss is assigned to Frame Relay service Link 1 Time Slot Assignment Rule Valid Network time slots are either labeled as Available or contain a Frame Relay link 1 assignment 8 36 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu Configuration Time Slot Assignment gt Frame Relay Network Assignments 2 The Frame Relay Network Assignments screen appears This screen contains a matrix of the current assignment status of all time slots on the Network interface 3 Enable or disable Time Slot Discovery When enabled the unit will examine all time slots not
257. nts in Chapter 5 of the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information May 1999 Preliminary Using NetScout Manager Plus Verifying Domains and Groups B gt Procedure From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window LELE ri e E D am a a Ei fa ee Verify that only FrameSaver SLV supported domains appear listed in the Domain column FrameSaver SLV supported domains include ATALK IPX RMON DECNET NETB SNA IP NET VINES IPV6 OSI Verify that S statistics collection appears for each domain listed in the Group column H hosts appears for the IP domain only Dashes occupy all other positions under the Group column Zeros appear under the Samples and Interval SH and LH columns Dashes appear under all Logging columns Stat Host Conv If all these requirements are met no further action is required Close the Configuration Manager window If all these requirements are not met a FrameSaver SLV supported domain needs to be added or if an unsupported domain needs to be deleted the Properties File must be edited May 1999 Preliminary 6 5 Using NetScout Manager Plus Correcting Domains and Groups Properties need to be edited when not using the
258. o events need to be generated eventIndex eventDescription eventType eventCommunity Default SLV Rising Event snmp trap 3 The alarm default tables starting on the next page show how each RMON default alarm is set by the NextEDGE unit shows the alarm and event types the interval used when generating alarms and thresholds m Physical Interface Alarm Defaults on page C 15 m Static Frame Relay Interface Alarm Defaults on page C 16 Dynamic Frame Relay Interface Alarm Defaults on page C 18 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area on page C 19 Static DLC Alarm Defaults NetScout Area on page C 20 Dynamic DLC Alarm Defaults NetScout Area on page C 21 See Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps on page C 3 for information about how traps work and Traps RMON Specific on page C 13 for traps specific to remote monitoring May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Rising Event Operation If a rising threshold is crossed during the interval shown in a table e g frames dropped by the network the event is armed and an alarm is generated at the end of the interval Only one alarm per event per interval is generated The alarm condition persists until the event has been disarmed reset The event is disarmed when a falling threshold has been crossed and the rising threshold has not been crossed during an interval allowing the event to return to its original disarmed
259. o abort all active tests on all interfaces see Aborting All Tests on page 11 16 When the status of a testis The only command available is Start or stop an individual test using the same procedure B gt Procedure To start and stop a loopback or a set pattern test 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test 2 Select an interface to be tested Network Data Port or ISDN PVC Tests or Network Data Port DSX 1 or PRI Physical Tests and press Return The selected test screen appears Start appears in the Command column Inactive appears in the Status column 3 Select the Port number and press Return 4 Select the DLCI number and press Enter if a PVC test has been selected The cursor is positioned at Start in the Command column of the first available test Start is highlighted 5 Highlight the Start command for the test you want to start and press Enter Stop now appears and is highlighted and the status of the test changes to Active 6 Press Enter to stop the test Start reappears and the status of the test changes back to Inactive 7 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 11 15 Troubleshooting Aborting All Tests Use the Abort All Tests selection from the Test menu to abort all tests running on all interfaces with exception to DTE initiated loopbacks To abort individual tests that are active see Starting a
260. o the frame relay router at one end of a management PVC can acquire the IP address of a FrameSaver unit at the other end of the PVC Standard RIP Routing Information Protocol allows the router to automatically learn the routes to all FrameSaver units connected to that FrameSaver unit Configuration Upload Download and Software Download Capability Provides quick transfer of configuration options to and from nodes and software downloads while the unit is running using a standard file transfer protocol FTP Two software loads can be stored Dual Flash Memory Allows software upgrades while the unit is up and running Two software loads can be stored to be implemented at the user s discretion DSX 1 Drop Insert Port Allows DTEs PBXs that support the DS1 signal format to share the T1 network with other high speed equipment so that voice traffic can share the same local access circuit as the frame relay data Two Customer Specified Configuration Storage Areas Allows quick switching of the system s configuration Menu Driven User Interface Provides an easy to use menu driven interface to locally or remotely configure manage maintain and access the system s extensive diagnostic capability Back to Back Operation Allows two NextEDGE FrameSaver units to be connected via a network crossover cable so a point to point configuration simulating a leased line environment can be simulated Network Management Support Operates and is compati
261. oaded into system memory nam ocd File Transfer Failed The file is not valid for this FrameSaver unit Invalid file A different Rxxxxxx ocd file will need to be downloaded Repeat the step or end the FTP session NOTE During the download a series of hash marks appear When the hash marks stop appearing there is a pause of about 30 seconds before the nam ocd File Transfer Complete message appears Please be patient Do not exit from FTP at this time WARNING A put to current cfg will replace all currently configured configuration options including the node s IP Address Always put configuration files to a customer configuration area so it can be modified before the file is loaded into the current configuration See Changing Software on page 10 39 to activate the newly downloaded software May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance Determining Whether a Download Is Completed To see whether a download has completed check the Identity screen selected from the Status menu Check Alternate Software Rev under the NAM Identity column If a software revision number appears the file transfer is complete f In Progress appears the file is still being transferred f Invalid appears no download has occurred or the download was not successful Changing Software Once a software upgrade is downloaded it needs to be activated When activated the unit resets then executes th
262. ollowing methods DTE port configured with a frame relay management PVC with the router providing RFC 1490 or Cisco encapsulation of the IP traffic COM port configured as a terminal for access to the menu driven async user interface using a VT 100 async terminal or compatible terminal or PC COM port connected to the manager or router for an IP management link using either PPP or SLIP as the link layer COM port connected to an external LAN adapter for Ethernet connectivity for an IP management link Remote management is accomplished via the following methods Merging or multiplexing management data with user data and transferring the information over a specified network PVC Dedicated frame relay PVC between FrameSaver units at each end of the circuit for in band management This is required when communicating with non FrameSaver equipment Management PVCs configured between DTE ports and RFC 1490 compliant or Cisco encapsulation routers at one or both ends of the circuit to route management and user data through the same port to the routers Configuring Local Management Control Local management methods are typically used at the central site or at large regional sites where the FrameSaver unit is colocated with the NMS This is illustrated in the Customer End User Management Overview page 2 2 When managing the FrameSaver unit locally you can establish a management link by 2 4 Creating a Management DLC Between the Ro
263. on Configuring the Communication Port 8 72 Select Communication Port to display or change the communication port configuration options see Table 8 17 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Communication Port Table 8 17 Communication Port Options 1 of 4 Port Use Possible Settings Terminal Net Link Default Setting Terminal Assigns a specific use to the COM port NOTE Ifthe Default IP Destination is set to COM see Table 8 11 Node IP Options and you change Port Use to Terminal the Default IP Destination is forced to None Terminal The COM port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection Net Link The COM port is the network communications link to the IP network or IP device port Data Rate Kbps Possible Settings 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 115 2 Default Setting 19 2 9 6 115 2 kbps Character Length Possible Settings 7 8 Default Setting 8 Specifies the rate for the COM port in kilobits per second Specifies the number of bits needed to represent one character NOTE Character length defaults to 8 and cannot be changed if Port Use is set to Net Link 7 Sets the character length to seven bits 8 Sets the character length to eight bits Use this setting if using the COM port as the network communication link Parity Possible Settings None Even Odd Default Setting None Provides a
264. onitor and display status and configuration screens Note Make sure at least one login is setup for Level 1 access or you may be inadvertently locked out NOTE See Resetting the FrameSaver Unit in Chapter 10 Operation and Maintenance should you inadvertently be locked out 4 Save your changes When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the screen and the cursor is repositioned at the Login ID field ready for another entry See Configuring SNMP NMS Security in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for more information about security configuration options Security is enabled by the Communication Port s Login Required option For a Telnet or FTP session the Telnet or FTP Session s Telnet Login Required or FTP Login Required option is also enabled 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 9 11 Security and Logins Modifying a Login Logins are modified by deleting the incorrect login and creating a new one Deleting a Login A login record can be deleted B gt Procedure To delete a login record 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Control Administer Logins 2 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area 3 Select PgUp or PgDn and press Return to page through login pages records until you find the one to be deleted 4 Once the correct record is displayed select Delete and press Enter 5 Save your deletion When the deletion is complete Command Co
265. onnect Time expires Disable Does not terminate Telnet session during inactivity Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Sets the amount of keyboard inactive time allowed before a user session is disconnected Display Conditions This option does not appear when Inactivity Timeout is disabled J NOTE Changing this setting does not affect the current session it changes all subsequent sessions 1 60 Up to an hour can be set I May 1999 Preliminary 8 63 Configuration 8 64 Table 8 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options 3 of 3 FTP Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the system responds as a server when an FTP file transfer protocol client on an interconnected IP network requests an FTP session This option must be enabled when downloading files Enable Allows an FTP session between the system and an FTP client l Disable Does not allow FTP sessions FTP Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a login ID and password are required for an FTP session If required the login used is the same login used for a menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Management Link Enable User is prompted for a login ID and password Disable No login is required for an FTP session FTP Max Receive Rate k
266. onnection the maximum number of PVCs has already been Delete another PVC created connection and try again Name Must be Unique Name entered for a Enter another 4 character name management PVC has for the logical management link been used previously No Destination Link New was selected from the Configure additional DLCls for DLCls Available PVC Connection Table but the network link and try again even though DLCls are available to form a connection no DLCls are available on the network link which is a suitable PVC Destination No DLCls available for New was selected from the connection PVC Connection Table but all configured DLCls have been connected No action needed or configure more DLCls and try again No DLCls available for connection New was selected from the Configure more network and or Management PVCs option Port 1 Links DLCls pairs and try screen but all Link DLCI again pairs have been connected No DLCls Available for Mgmt PVC New was selected from the Configure more network and or Management PVCs option Port 1 DLCls and try again screen but all configured DLCls have been connected May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Table 10 4 Device Messages 4 of 6 Message What It Indicates What To Do No DLCls Defined No more DLCls allowed No Primary Destination Link DLCls Available No Security Reco
267. onnection statuses are selected from the Status menu Only PVC connections with Source DLCls configured to be Active are shown See page 10 22 for an example of this screen Main Menu gt Status PVC Connection Status Table 10 9 PVC Connection Status Field Status What It Indicates It Indicates pu ise o Connections CEC connections have yet to be defined Link Network Identifies the cross connection of Port 1 DLCIs configured for the unit Network T1 network Port Port 1 Source destination is frame relay link x on Network n Virtual circuit is a management link that terminates in the unit where Name is the link name DLCI 16 to 1007 For standard DLCIs Identifies an individual link connection embedded within a DLCI EDLCI 0 to 62 For multiplexed DLCls only Identifies an individual link connection embedded within a DLCI Status Active 1 Identifies whether the physical Inactive interfaces LMIs and DLCls are all enabled and active for this PVC connection 1 For the circuit to be active both Source and Destination Statuses must be Active 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 10 21 Operation and Maintenance Time Slot Assignment Status 10 22 main status connections Device Name Refresh Node A PVC Connection Status Screen Example PVC CONNECTION STATUS Source Link Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 DLCI EDLCI 201 202 100 204 Mgmt PVC Dunedin Port 1 Po
268. onnector is needed for the DTE No special order cables are required Standard V 35 Crossover Cable A standard V 35 crossover cable with a 34 pin plug type connector on each end of the cable can be used to connect the FrameSaver unit s DTE port to another DCE The following illustration provides the pin assignments for the V 35 crossover cable TXD B RXD A RXD B TXC A TXC B D gt r mimnowricxKxenesexayvonnwv gt RXC A RXC B ETXC A ETXC B FRM GND SIG GND RTS CD DTR DSR LL rmon7nwr lt xXcCS lt KXFNVHIWMHA 98 16165a 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary D 7 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments T1 Network Cable 3100 F1 500 Network access is via a 20 foot cable with an RJ48C unkeyed plug type connector on each end The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each Receive Ring R1 From Network 1 Receive Tip T1 From Network 2 Transmit Ring R To Network 4 Canadian T1 Line Interface Cable 3100 F1 510 The T1 line interface cable is used in Canada as an interface between the FrameSaver unit s network connector and the T1 network interface The following shows pin assignments and the purpose of each RJ48C Plug Unkeyed Receive Ring 1 Receive Tip White Blue Transmit Ring 2 3 4 AERES White Orange White Orange Ep 6 T 98 16215 D 8 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments DSX 1 Connector If you
269. ons in Chapter 8 Configuration Options NOTE These configuration options do not pertain to tests commanded by the DTE like a DTE initiated External Loopback 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 11 13 Troubleshooting Changing the Test Timeout from OpenLane Diagnostic Wizard The system default for tests is the system s Test Timeout setting but it can be overridden from Diagnostic Wizard You can override the test duration for all tests or for a single test Prior to running tests from Diagnostic Wizard the test duration can be set from the Customize drop down menu B gt Procedure To override the timeout duration for all tests change the Test Timeout Value prior to running any tests Navigation Wizard Tests button Customize drop down menu gt Test Timeout Value Values range from one minute to 15 hours the default setting is 10 minutes B gt Procedure To override the timeout duration for one test 1 Select a DLCI from Navigation Wizard and the Tests button 2 Position the cursor over the Connectivity button in the test path and click the right mouse button A pop up menu appears 3 Select Test Timeout Value then set the test duration 4 Run the test When the test is concluded the Test Timeout Value reverts to the system default 11 14 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting Starting and Stopping a Test Use this procedure to start monitor or abort specific tests T
270. ord combination 4 2 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00 User Interface and Basic Operation If two sessions are already active Wait and try again If attempting to access the unit through Telnet the local Telnet client process returns a Connection refused message at the bottom of the screen If attempting to access the unit over the COM port or modem port not via Telnet the User Interface Already In Use screen is redisplayed The type of connection Telnet Connection Direct COM Port Connection or Direct Modem Port Connection for each current user is identified along with the user s login ID B gt Procedure To end the session k Press Ctrl a to switch to the function keys area of the screen 2 Type e Exit and press Return Fora COM port connected terminal the session is ended Fora modem port connected terminal the session is ended and the modem is disconnected Fora Telnet connection the session is closed and if no other Telnet or FTP session is occurring over the connection the modem is disconnected If ending a session from the Configuration branch see Saving Configuration Options in Chapter 8 Configuration May 1999 Preliminary 4 3 User Interface and Basic Operation Main Menu 4 4 Entry to all of the FrameSaver unit s tasks begins at the Main Menu which has five menus or branches The Access Level at the top of the screen only appears when secur
271. ords Port 1 DLCI Number is automatically created Options for the port from the multiplexed network DLCI Example Network DLCI 1001 gt Port 1 DLCI 1001 Network DLCI Type is set to Multiplexed Network CIR bps is automatically determined from LMI status update message if switch provides this information Otherwise the port rate is configured Port 1 CIR bps is set to the network DLCI s CIR Committed Burst Size Bc Bits is set to the network DLCI s CIR Excess Burst Size Be Bits is set to the network port rate minus the network DLCI s CIR DLCI Priority is set to High 1 The port rate is calculated at the time of discovery as the number of DSOs allocated to frame relay It is automatically configured once for each DLCI Should the number of DSOs change this value must be manually recalculated and changed via the Configuration branch May 1999 Preliminary 8 13 Configuration Automatic Configuration for Selected Frame Relay Discovery Mode 2 of 4 If the mode selected is Then setup configuration is 1MPort Management PVCs 2 Name is automatically created from the network cont d DLC as Mgmnnnn nnnn being the discovered multiplexed network DLCI number Example BO eee Network DLCI 1001 gt information see Table 8 12 Port 1 DLCI 1001 and Management PVC Options Mgm1001 Intf IP Address is taken from the Node IP Address Intf Subnet Mask is
272. ormation that identifies DLCls with the highest incidence of errors high bandwidth utilization and trends Provide summary information for the network volume and error leaders and DLCI traffic Provides an overall view of the network 7 10 Identifies DLCIs having the highest volume and 7 11 errors Compares DLCI traffic with volume and the 7 12 baseline bandwidth utilization and errors Provide summary information for a group list for a longer reporting period than other reports Provides service level information for an enterprise Provides service level information for various groups Provides service level information for customers Provides consolidated DLCI and network performance information onto a single page Consolidates bandwidth utilization network traffic 7 18 events occurring over the reporting period and availability and latency levels information Consolidates transmit burst analysis network 7 19 latency dropped frames frame size distribution and availability information Trend Reports Performs trend analysis on up to ten specified 7 20 variables for DLCIs May 1999 Preliminary 7 7 Concord s Network Health About Service Level Reports For long term analysis and reporting you will want to license the Service Level Reports application This application analyzes data collected over months or by quarters and provides service level information about an enterprise a
273. orts regardless of access level You cannot put a configuration file to the factory cfg or current cfg files under the system directory Configuration files should be put to a customer file cust1 cfg or cust2 cfg then loaded into the downloaded unit s Current Configuration via the menu driven user interface m You can only put a NAM program file nam ocd into a FrameSaver unit You cannot get a program file from the FrameSaver unit to a host Before putting a download file you must use the bin binary command to place the data connection in binary transfer mode m When transferring SLV user history information to the NMS you can only get a uhbcfull dat file It is recommended that you use the NMS application to get this information see Transferring SLV Statistics to an NMS on page 10 40 A data file uhbcfull dat or Imitrace syc cannot be put into a FrameSaver node LMI packet capture data Imitrace syc is not readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is active FrameSaver SLV units provide an additional feature that allows new software to be downloaded in the background using the selected bandwidth and without interfering with normal operation Downloads can be performed quickly using the full line speed or at a slower rate over an extended period of time You initiate an FTP session to a FrameSaver unit node in the same way as you would initiate an FTP to any other IP addressable device NOTE Loading a
274. ot assignment Valid DSX 1 time slots are those that are unassigned and the currently assigned time slot Order of display is as follows Available is the first selection Then from lowest DSX 1 interface to the highest DSX 1 interface Then lowest available time slot number to the highest available time slot number For example if the cursor is on a field with the Available value under assigned time slot Nxx pressing the Spacebar causes this field s values to cycle through all valid DSX 1 time slots starting with Ds p yy assuming it is unassigned If Ds p yy is already assigned the next valid time slot in the order described above is displayed B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Configuration gt Time Slot Assignment DSX to Network Assignments 2 The DSX 1 to Network Assignments screen appears This screen contains a matrix of the current cross connect status of all time slots on the Network interface 3 Move the cursor to the next editable time slot underlined Use the spacebar or type in the desired time slot to display the desired time slot assignment 4 Repeat Step 3 until all desired time slots are assigned Select Save to save the assignments or press Esc to return to the Time Slot Assignment menu 8 38 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration DSX 1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning The second page of the DSX 1 to Network Assignments screen e
275. out Manager Plus Network B gt Procedure 1 2 Bring up the NetScout Manager Plus main window Select the FrameRelay radio button from the agent type selection bar on the left side of the window File w Agent wr AgentGroup w Switch FrameRelay A list of configured frame relay agents appear in the list box below the Name and IP Address headings If this is a new NetScout Manager Plus installation the list box below the selection bar is blank since no agents are configured yet Select the Admin radio button from the application selection bar to the far right of the screen Applicable configuration and administration icons appear in the box below the application bar Help we Application gt Admin Click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window Select the Add button down the center of the screen Minimally enter the following Agent name IP address Enter 1 for the frame relay logical interface to be monitored Properties File Select paradyne Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add the agent discover its DLCls and return to the Configuration Manager main window The frame relay agent just entered appears in the agent list box with its DLCls in the DLCI list box at the bottom of the screen Select the Test button fourth button down center of the screen to make sure you can communicate with the agent Refer to Adding Frame Relay Age
276. outing information is automatically passed between interconnected FrameSaver units from the network side make sure to set a route to the subnet s in the NMS s or local router s routing table The gateway to subnet s is through the FrameSaver unit connected to Arouter s terminal server s or NMS s direct PPP point to point protocol or SLIP s link layer protocol for IP traffic serial connection or The router s DTE port using a local PVC or The LAN using a LAN adapter Be aware that each FrameSaver unit s routing table supports a maximum of 300 routes even though a single route is all that is needed to reach every device on a subnet Have a default route set only for devices directly connected to the NMS s COM port Allow any legal host address for a given subnet the address choice within the subnet is not important to the unit but it should be selected in conjunction with all IP addressing for the subnet NOTE When dealing with IP addressing your Information Systems IS department needs to be involved since they typically dictate the IP addressing scheme used in an organization May 1999 Preliminary B 1 IP Addressing Mixing Private and Public Addressing on the Same Network When customers are connected to the internet IP addresses are limited to the number of IP addresses they own Using FrameSaver units private addressing can be used for your network without taking away from t
277. ownload Failed Name 8 56 1 or 2 Access Access Community navigating the screens 4 6 NCC network control center Net Link Port Use NetOnly auto configuration NetScout Manager Plus from Performance Wizard NMS solution NMS support NetScout Manager Plus NMS support Network cable pin assignments Com Link Down DLCI records options 8 45 Health Concord compatibility Initiated ee Initiated PLB initiated tests interface LEDS interface options mixing private and public addressing on same network timeslot assignments 10 23 9124 A2 GH30 00 March 1999 Index Network Health installation and setup Network Initiated DCLB NMS IP Address 8 64 8 67 9 9 IP Validation OpenLane management solution SNMP security options NOC network operation center 3 2 Node IP Address 8 53 Subnet Mask Node IP configuration option tables NSP Number of Managers 8 64 9 9 Trap Managers O odd parity 8 71 OID cross reference numeric order OID object identification user history file OK LED OOF alarm condition at DSX 1 10 16 at Network 10 17 LED 10 4 10 5 linkDown trap C 5 OpenLane graphs 5 10 NMS solutions 5 1 NMS support operating changing mode for demos 8 21 the unit operation organization of this document Out of Frame linkDown trap C 5 Out of Sync message O
278. ows the FrameSaver unit rear panels and pin assignments for the connectors interfaces and cables Native interfaces are used on the unit so most cables do not have to be specially ordered they can be purchased anywhere NOTE In the pin assignment tables of this appendix if the pin number is not shown it is not being used The following illustration shows the FrameSaver 9124 rear panel PORT 1 DSX NET 99 16353 The sections that follow provide pin assignments for each interface May 1999 Preliminary D 1 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments COM Port Connector The following table provides the pin assignments for the FrameSaver 9124 unit s 25 position EIA 232C communication port connector Direction Shield GND DCE Transmit Data TXD DCE Receive Data RXD DCE Request to Send RTS DCE Clear to Send CTS To DTE Out 51 DCE Data Set Ready DSR From DTE In 61 Signal Ground GND 7 DCE Carrier Detect CD To DTE Out 8 DCE Data Terminal Ready DTR From DTE In 20 1 Pins 5 6 and 8 are tied together D 2 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments LAN Adapter Converter and Cable The following shows the pin assignments for the DB25 plug to modular jack converter between the COM port and the 8 conductor LAN Adapter cable and Custom 8 conductor cable with modular plugs on both ends between the converter and the LA
279. p Down Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP linkDown or linkUp traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s A linkDown trap indicates that the unit recognizes a failure in one of the interfaces A linkUp trap indicates that the unit recognizes that one of its interfaces is active Use the Link Traps Interface and the DLCI Traps on Interface configuration options to specify which interface will monitor linkUp and linkDown traps messages Disable Does not send linkDown or linkUp trap messages Up Sends trap messages for linkUp events only Down Sends trap messages for linkDown events only Both Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events Link Traps Interfaces Possible Settings Network DSX 1 T1s Ports All Default Setting All Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific trap J messages These traps are not supported on the COM port Network Generates these trap messages on the T1 Network interface only DSX 1 Generates these trap messages on the DSX 1 interface only if applicable T1s Generates trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on both the T1 Network and DSX 1 interfaces only Ports Generates trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on user data port only All Generates trap messages for linkUp and enterpriseSpecific events on the network and use
280. pical setting that would be used with the corresponding Network side value Typical pairs of values are shown in the table below If you change the Network side value the DSX side value is changed to the corresponding default value Table 8 7 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values 1 of 3 DSX 1 Side Network Default Side Value Meaning Value No signaling used on this DSO Use this setting if there is no voice signaling information being passed on this DSO clear channel RBS Robbed Bit Signaling is used on this DSO but no trunk default conditioning Signaling bits will be passed to the T1 interface to which this DSO is cross connected when this T1 interface is not in CGA but the signaling bits will be all ones when CGA is present 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 39 Configuration Table 8 7 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values 2 of 3 DSX 1 Side Network Default Side Value Meaning Value The following values will configure the cross connect for RBS as well as perform the trunk conditioning indicated when a CGA condition occurs Although the ABCD signaling bits for each setting are described only AB bits are transmitted when the cross connected T1 interface is using D4 framing E amp M idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 E amp M idle interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an E amp M interface ABCD 0000 E amp M busy The signaling bits transmitted to the
281. ptions on page 8 54 Management PVC Options on page 8 57 General SNMP Management Options on page 8 61 Telnet and FTP Sessions Options on page 8 62 SNMP NMS Security Options on page 8 65 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options on page 8 68 Communication Port Options on page 8 72 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 53 Configuration Configuring Node IP Information 8 54 Select Node IP to display add or change the information necessary to support general IP communications for the node see Table 8 11 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication Node IP Table 8 11 Node IP Options 1 of 3 Node IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the node Since an IP address is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node IP address with zeros Node Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the node Since the subnet mask is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the
282. r FrameSaver unit must be configured for Standard operation which is the setting for normal operation See Setting Up Units for Back to Back Operation in Chapter 10 Operation and Maintenance for additional information May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 User Interface and Basic Operation Logging On 9124 A2 GH30 00 Access to the easy to use menu driven user interface is provided through an async asynchronous or other VT100 compatible terminal PC terminal emulation or a Telnet session This chapter tells you how to access use and navigate the menu driven user interface It includes the following information Logging On see below Main Menu on page 4 4 Screen Elements on page 4 5 Navigating the Screens on page 4 6 What appears on the screens depends on Current configuration How your network is currently configured Security access level The security level set by the system administrator for each user Data selection criteria What you entered in previous screens Start a session using one of the following methods Telnet session over the COM port or modem port via An in band management channel through the frame relay network A local in band management channel configured on the DTE port between the FrameSaver unit and the router Dial in connection using the internal modem Direct terminal connection over the COM port May 1999 Preliminary 4 1 User Interface and Ba
283. r data ports May 1999 Preliminary 8 69 Configuration 8 70 Table 8 16 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 3 of 4 DLCI Traps on Interfaces Possible Settings Network Ports All Default Setting All Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp and linkDown trap messages for individual DLCls These traps are only supported on the frame relay interfaces Network Generates these trap messages on DLCls for the network interface only Ports Generates these trap messages for DLCls on the user data port only All Generates these trap messages on all frame relay interfaces RMON Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether remote monitoring traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s RMON traps are typically sent as a result of the Alarms and Events Groups of RMON1 when a selected variable s configured threshold is exceeded Enable Sends trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded Disable Does not send trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded Trap Dial Out Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether alarm or SNMP trap messages initiate a call automatically If the call cannot be completed and the Call Retry option is set to Enable the SNMP trap message is held queued until the call completes to either the Alarm or alternate directory Enable Automatically ca
284. r model includes a DSX 1 interface the following table shows the signals and pin assignments for the 8 position modular DSX 1 interface The DSX 1 Adapter is required for this interface see page D 9 Receive Ring R1 From DTE 1 Receive Tip T1 From DTE 2 Shield 3 Transmit Ring R To DTE 4 Transmit Tip Shield DSX 1 Adapter 9008 F1 560 The DSX 1 adapter cable is used as an interface between the unit s DSX 1 connector and the DTE s DB15 interface The following shows pin assignments and the purpose of each 8 Position Modular Plug Unkeyed Receive Ring 9 Receive Ring L E ooon Ge ee Receive Tip l l 1 Receive Tip White Blue White Blue Shield 4 Shield 1 DB15 Socket Transmit Ring Transmit Ring erage Orange 1 E ooo emn Transmit Tip 3 Transmit Tip White Orange White Orange Shield 2 Shield 99 16216a 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary D 9 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments D 10 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Technical Specifications Table E 1 Specification Approvals FCC Part 15 FCC Part 68 Industry Canada Safety Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Shock and vibration Physical Dimensions Height Width Depth Power Consumption and Dissipation 9124 A2 GH30 00 1 Slot FrameSaver Unit Technical Specifications 1 of 2 Criteria Class A digital device Refer to the equipment s
285. r more Out Of Frame OOF events Any second with more than one but less than 320 CRC errors Any second with one or more controlled slips a replication or deletion of a DS1 frame by the receiving device This is collected for network performance statistics only The number of Loss of Frame conditions The largest number of seconds for either ES UAS SES BES or CSS or the greatest Loss of Frame Count LOFC If more than one interval contains the same worst value then the oldest interval is displayed May 1999 Preliminary 10 35 Operation and Maintenance FTP File Transfers The FrameSaver unit supports a standard File Transfer Protocol FTP server over Transmission Control Protocol TCP to allow software upgrades copying configurations and SLV statistics gathering A complete binary image of the configuration files can be copied to a host to provide a backup To use this feature the unit must be configured to support Telnet and FTP Sessions Using this feature you can transfer configuration files to from a FrameSaver unit node program files to a FrameSaver unit node and User History data froma FrameSaver unit node through a user data port or the network interface using a management PVC or through the COM port Be aware of the following rules when doing a file transfer You must have Access Level 1 permission to use the put and get commands However you can retrieve the data file for the user history rep
286. r on self test of the unit recycling power B gt Procedure To reset the unit from the Control menu 1 2 From the Main Menu screen select Control Select Reset Device and press Enter The Are You Sure prompt appears Type y Yes and press Enter The unit reinitializes itself performing a self test Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power 9124 A2 GH30 00 Disconnecting then reconnecting the power cord resets the unit May 1999 Preliminary 11 3 Troubleshooting Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit Misconfiguring the unit could render the menu driven user interface inaccessible If this occurs connectivity to the unit can be restored via a directly connected asynchronous terminal B gt Procedure To reset COM port settings 1 Configure the asynchronous terminal to operate at 19 2 kbps using character length of 8 bits with one stop bit and no parity In addition set Flow Control to None 2 Reset the unit then hold the Enter key down until the System Paused screen appears See Resetting the Unit on page 11 3 for other methods of resetting the unit 3 Tab to the desired prompt and type y Yes at one of the prompts If selecting The following occurs Reset COM Port usage Port Use is set to Terminal so the asynchronous terminal can be used Data Rate Kbps Character Length Stop Bits and Parity are reset to the factory defaults External Modem Commands is set to
287. r units A and D share yet another subnet 135 18 4 0 Subnet 135 18 40 0 SNMP NMS Ethernet Subnet 135 18 2 0 135 18 2 2 135 18 40 1 Frame Relay Router L O N LED 4 LIOI 2 PPPS LOZ SS A I 5 z Ly 135 18 3 2 COM Port LLY Frame IP Address 135 18 40 3 ef Relay _ Network 135 18 3 3 5 Subnet 135 18 3 0 135 18 4 1 Subnet 135 18 4 0 Physical Connection PVC Connection This subnet connection can be to any of the following e Frame relay RFC 1490 IP router via the DTE Port e Frame relay non RFC router via AUX port to COM port e SNMP NMS via the COM Port e Terminal server via the COM Port e LAN adapter via the COM Port 98 16219 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary B 7 IP Addressing Routing to Remote FrameSaver Units Using Routers In the following examples the FrameSaver unit at the central site is connected to A router instead of a LAN connection m The router is connected to the NMS m The router s additional serial or AUX port connection is not used for management No additional network PVCs are required In the following examples data is not routed by the FrameSaver units and management PVCs are not configured between them Instead management data for the remote FrameSaver units is routed through the routers with management PVCs configured between the routers and FrameSaver units
288. rameSaver 9126 Units at Remote Sites 3 5 Mixing FrameSaver Units at Remote Sites 006 3 6 PVC Multiplexing and Port Aggregation Features 0 4 3 7 Using Auto Configuration o6ccecetesessceee beers iadendceaeeceeaw 3 8 Disaster Recovery Applications anana ccc eens 3 10 Backing Up to the Primary Destination Node Backing Up to a Neighboring Node 0 00 eee ee 3 14 m Back to Back Operation 0 00 ccc cece cence eee eens 3 15 4 User Interface and Basic Operation E LOOGING ON 2okscataavess busin nits btata edo a ea aun eto ine names tae 4 1 AMA VIG ere e wren te new ewe ae ew nowt ease Aw oe ae eos ee Ge 4 4 m Screen Elements ca ree eae ea hee een hee de eons eyes 4 5 m Navigating the Screens ccc ttt eee tenes 4 6 Keyboard KeyS iirc a nee na eed on cae OS Rea eae See Oe ee kare ee 4 6 Function KeyS aco at ond awd to ei eed see ea ee de ae ee eed 4 7 Selecting from a Menu 0 0 cece nannan 4 8 Switching Between Screen Work Areas 0c eee cece ees 4 8 SclCCHNO a Field sragngvecsduteeguiand shan dgwlacaysasenter eens 4 9 Entering Information su04 tere edeva deeds ieeestoeSeleeee deena 4 9 li May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 5 Contents Using the OpenLane NMS m The OpenLane Advantage 0 0 nannan cee eee 5 1 Using an OpenLane NMS Application 0 00 eee aee 5 2 m Installat
289. rds to Delete Password Matching Error Re enter Password 9124 A2 GH30 00 DLCI Records was selected Select New and create a DLCI from an interface s Configuration Edit Display menu and no DLCI Records have been created for this interface New or CopyFrom was selected from an interface s DLCI Records configuration screen and the maximum number of DLCI Records had already been reached New or Modify was selected from the PVC Connection Table but even though DLCls are available to form a connection no DLCls are available on the network link which is a suitable Primary PVC Destination Delete was selected from the Administer Login screen and no security records had been defined Password entered in the Re enter Password field of the Administer Logins screen does not match what was entered in the Password field May 1999 Preliminary Operation and Maintenance record Delete a DLCI then create the new DLCI Record Configure additional DLCls for the network or ISDN link and try again If a network or ISDN DLCI has been entered as a Source DLCI 1 Change the Source DLCI to a user data port DLCI 2 Enter the network or ISDN DLCI as the PVC s Primary Destination Configure additional DLCls for the network link and try again If a network DLCI has been entered as a Source DLCI 1 Change the Source DLCI to a user data port DLCI Enter the network DLCI as the P
290. re for future use Default Factory Configuration A read only configuration area containing the factory default set of configuration options You can load and edit default factory configuration settings but you can only save those changes to the Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration option areas The Current Customer 1 and Customer 2 configuration option areas are identical to the Default Factory Configuration until modified by the customer NOTE Only Security Access Level 1 users can change configuration options Security Access Level 2 users can only view configuration options and run tests Security Access Level 3 users can only view configuration options they cannot change configuration options or run tests 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 7 Configuration Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options To access and display configuration options load copy the applicable configuration option set into the edit area B gt Procedure To load a configuration option set into the configuration edit area 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration The Load Configuration From menu appears Select the configuration option area you want to load and press Return Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 or Default Factory Configuration The selected configuration option set is loaded into the configuration edit are
291. re that increasing bandwidth used for SLV communications reduces bandwidth available for user data Disable Extra byte is not included DLCI Down on SLV Timeout Available Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether missed SLV packets will be moniotred along with the LMI status to determine the status of PVC connections to remote FrameSaver units NOTE This option only applies to multiplexed DLCls Enable After the configured threshold for missed SLV packets has been exceeded an alarm and SNMP trap are generated a Health and Status message created and the DLCI s status turns Inactive If an ISDN DBM is installed backup is initiated Disable Missed SLV communications will not be monitored 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 25 Configuration Table 8 2 Service Level Verification Options SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 3 Specifies the number of consecutively missed SLV commnications that willl be tolerated before an SLV Timeout Error Event is declared 1 20 Sets the limit for these error events SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of consecutively missed SLV communications that willl be received before the SLV Timeout Error Event is cleared 1 20 Sets the limit for the clearing event Configuring Gen
292. rification This application gathers network performance data from a FrameSaver SLV unit s user history collection buckets to provide an accurate view of network traffic at any time Some of its features include Java based for operating system flexibility it runs on UNIX or Windows Real time graphical displays of service level verification parameters latency availability and frame delivery ratios which includes the ability to report accurate measurements of dropped frames transmitted above or within CIR Committed Information Rate Real time displays include PVC throughput data delivery analysis transmit burst analysis frame size distribution physical link performance network utilization diagnostics and congestion data Web based daily weekly and monthly reports designed to verify frame relay service level agreements Automatic end to end PVC discovery and configuration to eliminate or minimize manual configuration and operator intervention Enhanced navigation with the intuitive standard folder concept automatically creates folders that group devices for network partitioning and circuit name identification and search utilities for finding devices by their name Enhanced diagnostic capabilities with loopback and PVC testing May 1999 Preliminary 1 7 About the FrameSaver SLV NetScout Manager Plus This application supports FrameSaver SLV units and NetScout Probes with complete LAN and WAN traffic ana
293. ring customer profiles and data collection as the network administrator or Viewing selected reports as a customer Enter your customer ID In the resulting pop up window enter your User ID or enter as an administrator then your Password Reports Administration As the network administrator you have the ability to perform the following functions Create modify and delete customer profiles Customer profiles contain information such as the customer s name account number address including e mail phone number a contact name and any additional comments Customer profiles also contain the customer s access level either reports only or administrative Via customer profiles you determine which Web server users have access to what FrameSaver SLV devices for the SLM Reports Modify authorized user logins Determine which Web server users are authorized to log in as the customer listed in the profile Modify assigned devices Determine which FrameSaver SLV devices in the network the customer listed in the profile can access Administer data collection Enable data collection on devices that have already been added to the OpenLane Device Explorer database For data collection a 12 hour window is recommended Any data collection errors causing a delay of over 24 hours will result in a loss of data 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 5 27 Using the OpenLane NMS Viewing Reports As a Web user with a customer p
294. rk and their interfaces Connection Shows the PVC connections Historical Collection Shows whether historical data is being collected for the interface or PVC Based upon the item that is highlighted appropriate graph selection buttons appear near the bottom of the window Once a graph window is open other graphs can be launched from the graph selections under the menu bar Paradyne QpenLane Device Explorer File Edit Action Help End Point Connection Historical Collection fy Entire Network amp 135 90 153 3 W COM Port W Ti on Network Port Frame Relay on Network Port OLCI 100 OLCI 100 OLCI 120 H Frame Relay on Data Port 1 DOLCI 100 OLEI 100 DOLCI 211 c OLEI 153 OLEI 153 DLCI 253 DOLCI 253 DLC 253 DLCI 120 amy 13590 1534 W COM Port WTI on Network Port W Frame Relay on Network Port L OLEI 120 DLC 120 DOLCI 100 W Frame Relay on Data Port 1 r DLC 120 DLC 120 DOLCI 253 DOLCI 253 DLC 253 DLCI 153 SUmMmAary Integrity Diagnostic PARADYNE Ti FrameSaver SLY Model 9124 A Notice the green icon at the bottom of the window Move the cursor over the icon and the status message says Historical Daemon Running lf the Historical Daemon is not running a red circle with a slash through it overlays the icon 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 5 3 Using the OpenLane NMS Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to Your Network Use either one of these procedures to add FrameSaver
295. rmation rate that had been configured Tx Rx Frames Number of frames sent received for the DLCI on the interface With DE that have the discard eligible bit set Tx BECN Frames Number of Backward Explicit Congestion Notifications BECNs sent over the interface BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in the J opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator Rx BECN Frames Number of Backward Explicit Congestion Notifications received over the interface The network sends BECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator Rx FECN Frames Number of Forward Explicit Congestion Notifications FECNs received for the selected DLCI on the interface The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 10 29 Operation and Maintenance Frame Relay Performance Statistics These statistics appear when Frame Relay is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status gt Performance Statistics Frame Relay Table 10 12 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 1 of 4 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay Link Frames Sent Number of frames sent over the interface Frames Received Number of frames received over the interface Characters Sent Number of data octets bytes sent over the interface Ch
296. rmitted Have duplicate numbers each range limit must be unique Enter a number lower than the lowest limit shown or higher than the highest limit which is all 9s e g 9999999 6 Continue Steps 3 through 5 until all desired edit changes have been made then select the Set button The changed settings become the new Upper Limits Getting Error Messages Error messages may appear in the messages area at the bottom of the window to indicate when there is a problem e g Unable to set table SNMP Error No such name When this type of error occurs you need to resynchronize with the FrameSaver unit B gt Procedure To resynchronize 1 Leave the current view and return to the Device Explorer main window 2 Select Device Sync from the File menu 3 Return to the view where the error message appeared The error message should be gone If the error message is not cleared see the OpenLane Performance Wizard User s Guide or the Help feature for additional information 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 5 9 Using the OpenLane NMS Viewing OpenLane Performance Wizard Graphs The following OpenLane Performance Wizard graphs support FrameSaver SLV units integrating the new service level verifier capability provided by FrameSaver SLV units into Device Explorer Frame Relay Access Channel Aggregated Summary Capacity Throughput and Heaviest Users Output Frame Relay Physical Link Integrity Thro
297. rofile defined by your network administrator you have the ability to view reports for the FrameSaver SLV devices assigned to you Upon entering your customer ID your User ID and Password in the pop up window the FrameSaver SLV Reports window displays giving you the opportunity to select one the reports For specific information on SLM Reports refer to the SLM Reports online Help which contains detailed information consisting of a description and typical uses for each report An example is also provided to show how a company could use the information provided by this powerful tool 5 28 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Using NetScout Manager Plus This chapter includes Significant features of NetScout Manager Plus m Installation and setup of NetScout Manager Plus software Configuration of NetScout Manager Plus Release 5 5 or higher of the NetScout Manager Plus software provides FrameSaver SLV specific support The NetScout Advantage NetScout Manager Plus features Large central site location Layers 2 through 7 monitoring Remote Probe location Layers 1 through 3 monitoring RMON1 and RMON2 customization m Flexible customized drill down tool set Historical and real time analysis and reporting m LAN WAN and switched LAN support Protocol analysis Threshold alarming m Web access Familiar interface almost identical to both Motif and Windows environments Integrates with other manageme
298. rovides the following automatic configuration features performance statistics LEDs and control leads RMON Based User History Statistics Gathering Provides a complete view of the network s and a data port s performance through the statistical data collected SLV DLCI frame relay and DBM call statistics All the data collected for a specified interval is stored in a bucket Two default J intervals are used 15 minutes and one day Using these intervals the system can collect display and store 24 hours of 15 minute buckets 96 buckets and five 24 hour data buckets simultaneously providing up to five days of daily statistical totals These intervals can be changed using the NetScout Manager Plus application User Selectable Ranges for Frame and Burst Sizes Provides user configurability for statistical data collection using OpenLane DCE Manager to set upper and lower limits for data collection The accumulated data is used for graphs and reports and to trigger alarms Extensive Testing Capability Provides a variety of tests to identify and diagnose device network and PVC problems with continuous and nondisruptive background latency testing unique nondisruptive frame relay diagnostics for troubleshooting and testing DLCls and local remote line speed reporting to identify rate mismatches The following are provided are nondisruptive to data when between NextEDGE and FrameSaver devices Physical interface tests various
299. rrors are causing the greatest number of problems Mi Jiga hip Surowy irinari Dipoi Denice Ea plore inh She ai 12 TU ie iig Pell Emms Gel s z i Threw i pari Erami raren raet 5 pr mi Parr Bn Ea Bes FS pe Hnkran Brodoca FETES CLE j E e i imr ree Pere 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 5 15 Using the OpenLane NMS Correlate the time at which a problem occurred to the following graphs Throughput Shows the actual volume of data in frames per second for both incoming and outgoing data over the T1 link Errored Frames Shows the number of frames per second during which a Severely Errored Seconds or Bursty Errored Seconds condition existed for both incoming and outgoing data over the T1 link calculated on the percent of the time interval shown Unknown Protocol Frames Shows the number of frames per second that were counted when the unit could not recognize the protocol used in the packet When errors occur on the T1 link select the Diagnostic button under the menu bar for additional insight to the problem See Chapter 11 Displaying System Information for additional information on these types of errors 5 16 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Using the OpenLane NM DS1 Physical Link Diagnostics T1 Only S Use this summary graph when errors are detected on the T1 link This window is only available to a FrameSaver unit with a T1 interface wh
300. rsor to the previous field Ctrl k Backspace Move cursor one position to the left or to the last character of the previous field Spacebar Delete Del Up Arrow or Ctrl u Select the next valid value for the field Delete character that the cursor is on Move cursor up one field within a column on the same screen Down Arrow or Ctrl d Move cursor down one field within a column on the same screen Right Arrow or Ctrl f Move cursor one character to the right if in edit Left Arrow or Ctrl b Enter Return Move cursor one character to the left if in edit mode Redraw the screen display clearing information typed in but not yet entered Accept entry or display valid options on the last row of the screen when pressed before entering data or after entering invalid data May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Function Keys 9124 A2 GH30 00 User Interface and Basic Operation All function keys located in the lower part of the screen see the example on page 4 5 operate the same way throughout the screens They are not case sensitive so upper or lowercase letters can be used interchangeably These keys use the following conventions For the screen Select function And press Enter to M orm MainMenu Return to the Main Menu screen Eore Exit Terminate the async terminal session Norn Enter new data L or Delete Delete data Rorr Refresh Update screen with current informatio
301. rt 1 Port 1 Port 1 206 207 208 209 ESC for previous Network Channels DSX 1 Channels May 1999 Preliminary Destination Link Network Network Network Network Network Network Network Network Network Network DLCI 300 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 500 502 EDLCI PARADYNE 9124 01 26 1998 23 32 Page 1 of 2 Status Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Inactive Inactive MainMenu Exit Time slot assignments are made using the Time Slot Assignment configuration option See Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections in Chapter 9 Configuration Options for making time slot assignments Use the Timeslot Assignment Status screen to display time slot assignments for 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance Displaying Network Time Slot Assignments Use the Network Timeslot Assignment Status screen to display DSO assignments for each DSO on the network interface Use the following menu sequence to display network channel information Main Menu gt Status gt Timeslot Assignment Status Network The Network Timeslot Assignment Status screen displays 24 two field entries in three rows Together each two field entry defines the assignment for one Network interface time slot The top field represents the time slot of the Network Interface The bottom field represents the cross connect status of the associated top field network time slot The following inform
302. ry files specific to the FrameSaver unit These files have a pdn udh user defined history format and are found in the PerfWiz netscout userHistory directory The userHistory files should be moved to SNSHOME usr So they can be used A separate udh file must be created and loaded for each DLCI or link that will be monitored before a customized user history table can be loaded Use a text editor to create these udh files by Copying one of the interface specific files DLCI or link and editing it using one of the examples provided as a guide Copying one of the examples provided and editing the extensions to fit the FrameSaver unit CAUTION Two user history table files are already configured and installed in the unit UserHistory1 and UserHistory2 These files must not be modified Paradyne uses these two tables to keep SLV data for reports It is always a good idea to rediscover agents and their DLCls before starting to be sure your agent and DLCI lists are current To rediscover agents and their DLCls select the Learn button on the NetScout Manager Plus main window the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected May 1999 Preliminary 6 13 Using NetScout Manager Plus B gt Procedure 1 Open a terminal window and go to SNSHOME usr 2 Copy an example or interface specific file to a new file that contains the user history table number Open the new file using a text editor The variables in the
303. sic Operation When logging on the menu driven user interface screen is blank Press Return to activate the interface One of the following occurs f no security was set up or security was disabled the Main Menu screen appears see page 4 4 You can begin your session If security was set up and is enabled you are prompted for a login Enter your login ID and password When the user interface has been idle a session is automatically ended and the screen goes blank when the unit times out Press Return to reactivate the interface B gt Procedure To log in when security is being enforced 1 Enter your assigned Login ID and press Return 2 Enter your Password and press Return Valid characters All printable ASCII characters Number of characters Up to 10 characters can be entered in the Login ID and Password fields Case sensitive Yes An asterisk appears in the password field for each character entered If your login was Then the Valid Main Menu appears see page 4 4 Begin your session Invalid Message Invalid Password is displayed on line 24 and the Login screen is redisplayed After three unsuccessful attempts A Telnet session is closed The User Interface Idle screen appears for a directly connected terminal An external modem is disconnected An SNMP trap is generated Access is denied See your system administrator to verify your login Login ID Passw
304. sical Options Configuring the DSX 1 Interface Physical Options Configuring Data Port Physical Options 00005 m Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections 000 cece eens Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface Assigning DSX 1 Time Slots to the Network Interface DSX 1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning Configuring Frame Relay LMI for the Unit 006 Configuring DLC Records for Each Interface 0005 Configuring PVC Connections 0 ccc ee eens Setting Up Management and Communication Options Configuring Node IP Information 00 000 cece eee eee Configuring Management PVCs 00 cc eee eee ees Configuring General SNMP Management 00006 Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support Configuring SNMP NMS Security 00 0 cee eee eee Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Configuring the Communication Port 000 e ee eee ees Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary V Contents 9 Security and Logins LIMIUNG ACCOSS Gutaugescuandamdscnuen seu eheewee caw teers eae ies 9 1 Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access 00 0c e eee 9 2 Controlling Telnet or FTP ACCESS 0 0c cece eee eens 9 3 Limiting T
305. sing FrameSaver 9124 units at regional and remote sites The SLV Service Level Verifier application shown below provides RMON capability at the central site and remote sites This capability provides Physical Frame Relay and Network layer protocol statistical buckets for remote troubleshooting and frame relay SLV monitoring Remote Frame Sites Relay Central Router Site FrameSaver Frame 9124 Relay Unit Router Paradyne OpenLane and NetScout e NMS Application Frame E _ o Relay Network Frame Relay FrameSaver Frame Router 9124 Unit Router FrameSaver 9624 Unit 98 15874 May 1999 Preliminary 3 3 Typical Applications 3 4 When the FrameSaver unit detects a failure the unit proactively notifies the management station so the management station can actively monitor network conditions OpenLane Performance Wizard provides service providers or commercial end users and their customers with SLV reports through the World Wide Web The NOC s network operation center s OpenLane management system must have access to the frame relay network so the system needs to be is inside the network service provider s protective firewall The SLV Reports Web server which is outside the firewall enables communication with the customer Web browser and authenticates customer logins for access to SLV data This is shown in the example below Remote Frame SLV Reports Sites Relay Central Web S
306. source link Clear Clears the Source Link and Source DLCI settings and suppresses Source EDLCI Source DLCl Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLC must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTE Source DLCI has no value if Source Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number inclusive Source EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option only appears when Source DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number inclusive Destination Link i Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface used as the destination link the to end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if the network interface has no DLCls defined this interface would
307. ss connected T1 PLAR4busy interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an PLAR D4 interface ABCD 0000 DPO idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 DPT idle interface during a CGA represent the idle state fora DPO interface ABCD 0000 DPO busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 DPT busy interface during a CGA represent the busy state for a DPO interface ABCD 1111 DPT idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 DPO idle interface during a CGA represent the idle state fora DPT interface ABCD 0000 DPT busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 DPO busy interface during a CGA represent the busy state for a DPT interface ABCD 1111 USER xxxx The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 USER xxxx interface during a CGA represent a user defined pattern of ABCD xxxx 1 xxxx is the same value on both the Network and the DSX 1 sides 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 41 Configuration Clearing Assignments Clearing assignments sets all time slots to unassigned Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Time Slot Assignment Clear Assignments Configuring Frame Relay LMI for an Interface Select Frame Relay from the selected Network or Data Ports menu Based upon the information about the local management interface LMI and assigned line conditions
308. state Physical Interface Alarm Defaults These alarms only apply to the NextEDGE unit s network interface They are created during RMON initialization and put into the Paradyne defined alarm area Rising Falling Threshold Threshold MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Default Default Errored Seconds MIB DS1 E1 MIB RFC 1406 900 secs Tag dsx1TotalESs comes OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 18 9 1 2 1 Unavailable MIB DS1 E1 MIB RFC 1406 900 secs poeaiee Tag dsx1TotalUASs orn OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 18 9 1 5 I 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 inthe OID Interface ID of the frame relay link 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary C 15 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Static Frame Relay Interface Alarm Defaults Table D 2 Static Frame Relay Interface Alarm Defaults 1 of 2 Invalid Frames Short Frames Long Frames Rx Discards Tx Discards Rx Total Errors Tx Total Errors MIB Tag OID 2 MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxilFrames OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 MIB devfrext mib E Tag
309. stics verifier SLV service provider management control Session Access Level ending starting Set eet setting date and time 8 5 frame and burst ranges 5 8 setting up auto configuration considerations when external modem historical data collection management configuration SIG LED SLA SLIP SLM Reports creating 5 26 installation and setup 5 27 Slot Assignment information 10 23 10 24 SLV service level verifier 1 1 feature summaries 1 3 Delivery Ratio DLCI Down on Timeout frame relay access options 8 25 performance statistics reports March 1999 IN 9 Index Sample Interval secs Timeout Error Event Threshold SNMP assigning community names access levels 9 7 limiting access 9 6 Management NMS security options Number of Managers Traps downloading standards compliance software changing 10 39 download downloading requirements revision NAM Source Spacebar specifications technical E 1 Standard_out RIP 1 5 standards compliance SNMP traps C 3 starting a session graphs Performance Wizard statistics elements selecting performance intervals for display 10 33 uploading to an NMS 10 40 Status DLCI Enquiry LMI information 10 11 LED menu branch PVC connection timeslot assignment Stop Bits 8 72 stopping a test 11 15 Subnet assigning IP
310. t number followed by two digits and one alphabetic character 10 2 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance Viewing LEDs and Control Leads 9124 A2 GH30 00 The FrameSaver 9124 unit s faceplate includes LEDs light emitting diodes that provide status on the unit and its interfaces FrameSaver SLV 99 15821 02 The Display LEDs and Control Leads feature allows you to monitor a remote unit and is useful when troubleshooting control lead problems This feature is selected from the Status menu Main Menu Status Display LEDs and Control Leads main status leds PARADYNE 9124 Device Name Node A 1 26 1998 23 32 DISPLAY LEDS amp CONTROL LEADS GENERAL NETWORK OK Sig Alarm OOF Test Alm ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh When using this feature m Inverse video indicates that the LED Is on Normal video indicates that it is off May 1999 Preliminary 10 3 Operation and Maintenance LED Descriptions The following tables describe what these LEDs indicate Table 10 1 General Status LEDs Label Indication OK Power and Operational Status ALM Operational Alarm Fail Test Mode Color Green Red Yellow What It Means ON OFF FrameSaver unit has power and is operational FrameSaver unit is in a power up self test or there is a failure FrameSaver unit has just been reset or an error or fault has been detected
311. t is monitoring the selected test frame_relay_link 1 2 pattern on the specified DLCI for the interface Monitor Pttn Active Inteface A Monitor Pattern test user selected pattern is active on the specified interface and in the specified slot This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay Send Pitn Active Inteface A send pattern test is active on the specified interface Send Pttn Active DLC nnnn FrameSaver unit is monitoring the selected test frame_relay_link 1 2 pattern on the specified DLCI for the interface No Test Active No tests are currently running PVC Loopback Active DLCI nnnn A PVC Loopback is active on the specified DLCI frame_relay_link and frame relay link nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame_relay_link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified by for the network port Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 10 19 Operation and Maintenance Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status 10 20 Network LMl reported DLCI statuses are selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status LMI Reported DLClIs The LMI Reported DLCls screen displays the status and CIR if supported by the switch for each DLCI whether the DLCI is configured or not An asterisk identifies each DLCI contained in the device configuration Data and LMI status rece
312. t packet capture While capturing data the status is Active Packets in Buffer indicates the number of packets that have been captured Up to 8000 packets can be held lf the utility is left to overrun the buffer only the most current 8000 packets are retained 3 To stop the utility press Return The field toggles back to Start 4 Upload the data file holding the collected packets to a diskette so the information can be transferred to a Network General Sniffer for debugging decoding See FTP File Transfers in Chapter 10 Operation and Maintenance to learn how to transfer a data file 11 28 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Menu Hierarchy Menus The following is a graphical representation of the FrameSaver SLV unit s menu organization 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary Menu Hierarchy Menu Hierarchy MAIN MENU Status Status System and Test Status Test LMI Reported DLCIs Configuration PVC Connection Status Timeslot Assignment Status Auto Configuration Only if a DSX 1 Interface Control Performance Statistics Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity System and LMI PVC Connection Timeslot Identity Performance Test Status Reported Status Assignment System and Statistics Health and DLCIs Source Link Status Nam Service Level Verification Status DLCI DLCI EDLCI Network System Name DLCI e Self Test Results Status e Primary Timeslot Status Contact and Frame Relay Test S
313. t the busy state for an FXS Loop Start interface ABCD 1111 FXOD idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 FXSD idle interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXODN interface ABCD 0000 FXOD busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 FXSD busy interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXODN interface ABCD 1111 8 40 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Table 8 7 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values 3 of 3 DSX 1 Side Network Default Side Value Meaning Value FXSD idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 FXOD idle interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXSDN interface ABCD 0000 FXSD busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 FXOD busy interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXSDN interface ABCD 1111 PLAR3idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 PLARSidle interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a PLAR D3 interface ABCD 0000 PLARSbusy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 PLARSbusy interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an PLAR D3 interface ABCD 1111 PLAR4idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 PLAR4idle interface during a CGA represent the idle state fora PLAR D4 interface ABCD 1111 PLAR4busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cro
314. t the frame relay equipment and use external test equipment The Line Loopback LLB loops the information received on the selected interface back to the source of the loopback When used with a pattern test at the remote node LLB determines whether the problem is with the sending device or the T1 facility Framer Other lt fe T1 All Interface 1S The T1 l Interface l l 97 15336 CAUTION Line Loopback may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted An LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Payload Loopback Send Remote Line Loopback or an active Monitor Pattern on this network interface m Repeater Loopback on any other T1 interface with DSOs assigned to this network interface m Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this interface m Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous and assigned to this network interface May 1999 Preliminary 11 19 Troubleshooting Payload Loopback The Payload Loopback PLB loops the information received on the selected interface back to the network after it has passed through the receive and transmit framing section of the device Use the PLB to d
315. tatus mib m inkDown LMI is down for the LMI Protocol configured or Frame Relay link is disabled ifString LMI down No alarms exist on the link E g Frame Relay link Chicago on T1 Network LMI down SifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay link is enabled String SifString up linkDown LMI is down for the LMI Protocol configured or Frame Relay link is disabled Strings SifString LMI down SifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay link is enabled String SifString up 3 Ifthe LMI Protocol is not configured a linkUp linkDown trap is based solely upon whether the interface is enabled or disabled May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps enterprise Specific These traps indicate that an enterprise specific event has occurred Supported enterprise specific traps include the following listed in alphabetical order Table C 5 enterprise Specific Traps 1 of 2 Trap What It Indicates It Indicates Possible Possible Cause enterpriseCIR ee has changed due to LMI Protocol is set to Change 115 the LMI report and the network s CIR changed enterpriseConfig Configuration has been Configuration has been changed Change 6 changed via the async user via
316. tatus CIR bps Destination Link DSX 1 Location ESF Line DLCI EDLCI Timeslot Status Serial Number Clear All Statistics Status Current and Alternate Software Revisions e Hardware Revision MAIN MENU Status Test Test Network PVC Tests Configuration Data Port PVC Tests Auto Configuration Network Physical Tests Caol Data Port Physical Tests DSX 1 Physical Tests Only if a DSX 1 Interface IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests PVC Tests DLCI Network DSX 1 IP Ping Data Port DLCI Number Test Physical Tests IP Address Physical Tests Command Status Test Command Status and Results Status DTE Loopback and Result Line Loopback PVC Loopback Payload Loopback e Send Pattern Repeater Loopback e Monitor Pattern Send Pattern e Connectivity e Monitor Pattern e Send Line Loopback Network only 99 16345a A 2 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Menu Hierarchy MAIN MENU SIGS Load Test Configuration Configuration Edit Display from Auto C onfiguration System Network Control DSX 1 Only if a DSX 1 Interface Data Ports Time Slot Assignment Only if a DSX 1 Interface PVC Connections Management and Communication System Network and Time Slot PVC Connection Frame Relay and LMI Data Ports Assignment Table e Service Level e Physical e Frame Relay To e Source Link DLCI Verification Frame Relay Network Assignments EDLCI e General DLCI Records DSX 1 To Network e Prim
317. te FrameSaver FrameSaver Feature SLV 9124 SLV 9124 Remote Connections PVCs Remote Management Connections EDLCls 122 Dedicated Management PVCs 2 Intelligent Service Level Verification Provides Quality of Service or QoS features for determining whether service level agreements SLAs are being met and whether the network or the customer s data is the cause of missed SLAs Actual service level agreement parameters and thresholds for service level verification can be configured May 1999 Preliminary 1 3 About the FrameSaver SLV 1 4 TruePut Technology Using Frame Delivery Ratios FDR and Data Delivery Ratios DDR throughput both within and above CIR can be measured precisely eliminating inaccuracies due to averaging These ratios are available through OpenLane Performance Wizard s service level management reports Frame Relay Discovery For automatic discovery of network DLCls and configuration of a data port DLCI the PVC connection anda management PVC which is multiplexed with user data DLCls Time Slot Discovery For automatic discovery of network time slots and configuration of corresponding time slots in the system LMI Protocol Discovery For automatic configuration of the protocol being used by the network Extensive Monitoring Capability Provides status information to monitor and evaluate the system s and network s operation via the Status menu Auto Configuration P
318. ter 8 Configuration Options when configuring the FrameSaver unit It contains tables describing all configuration options and their possible settings Changing the Auto Configuration setting can also change the FrameSaver unit s configuration See Setting Up Auto Configuration on page 8 10 for additional information Configuration Option Areas The FrameSaver unit arrives with configured factory default settings which are located in the Factory Default configuration option area You can find the default settings for configuration options in the Quick Reference Configuration option tables in Chapter 8 If the factory default settings do not support your network s configuration you can customize the configuration options to better suit your application 8 6 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration B gt Procedure To change configuration option settings 1 Access and display configuration options and their settings 2 Change the settings as needed 3 Save the changes to one of three configuration option areas Four configuration option storage areas are available Configuration Option Area Description Current Configuration The currently active set of configuration options Customer Configuration 1 An alternate set of configuration options that the customer can set up and store for future use Customer Configuration 2 Another alternate set of configuration options that the customer can set up and sto
319. terface is disabled any existing cross connect assignments for this interface will be cleared no alarms or traps for this interface will be generated no configuration options will be displayed and all LEDs associated with this interface will remain off If you attempt to disable the Network 2 interface for which cross connections exist the message This action will clear all Network n Cross Connections Are You Sure No appears If you select No The operation is cancelled Yes The following occurs a All existing cross connect assignments for this interface are cleared Alarms or traps associated with this interface are not generated LEDs associated with this interface are held in an off state a All time slot assignments associated with the Network physical interface will be deallocated NOTE No Frame Relay DLCI or PVC connections will be deleted Line Framing Format Possible Settings D4 ESF Default Setting ESF Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the T1 network interface D4 Uses D4 framing format NOTE This setting is not recommended by network carriers False yellow alarms may occur after traffic has been running and the channel returns to idle or when there is light traffic when other settings are selected ESF format does not create this problem ESF Uses Extended Superframe framing format May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 9124 A2 GH30 00
320. terface is off Port 1 DLCI nnnn Down The DLCI for the specified Verify that the network LMI is up frame_relay_link frame relay link is down If it is contact your network service provider Device Fail yyyyyyyy An internal error has been 1 Provide the 8 digit failure code detected by the operating yyyyyyyy that follows the software alarm to your service representative 2 Clear the Device Fail message Main Menu Control gt Clear Device Fail DTR Down from The DTR control lead on Examine the attached DTE and Slot s Port p Device the device connected to the cable connected to the system s specified port is off This port 1 Check that the port cable is securely attached at both ends 2 Check the status of the attached equipment message applies to data ports that act as DCEs EER at Network 1 The error rate of the For the network interface received network signal has exceeded the currently configured threshold An Excessive Error Rate EER condition only occurs 2 Contact your network provider when the network interface is configured for ESF framing 1 Verify that the cable is securely attached at the Network interface May 1999 Preliminary 11 5 Troubleshooting Table 11 1 Alarm Conditions 2 of 4 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do For the Network interface LMI Down The Local Management frame_relay_link Interface is down for the specified frame relay lin
321. ternal Loopback test started on Sync Data Port SO1P1 All tests have been halted on an interface or virtual circuit String testString test started on ifString E g DTE External Loopback test stopped on Sync Data Port SO1P1 9124 A2 GH30 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Variable Bindings enterpriseTestStart Stop Tests that affect the enterprise TestStart and enterprise TestStop traps and variable bindings are different for each interface Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause 9124 A2 GH30 00 Physical Sublayer T1 Network m ifLink RFC 1513 0 0 placeholder devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib Virtual Circuits DLCls devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib devFrExtDiciDici devFrExt mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus Network mib Synchronous Data Port Service Side of the Frame Relay Link DTE Side of the Frame Relay Link May 1999 Preliminary enterpriseTest Start The following tests are active on the interface DSU Loopback CSU Loopback Send 511 pattern Monitor 511 pattern enterprise Test Stop No longer any tests running on the interface linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the port enterprise Test Start A test is active on the interface String testString test started on ifString enterprise Test Stop No longer any tests runn
322. the DLCI s CIR Transmit Frame Size Distribution to see the size of the packets that were transmitted End to End Data Delivery Success Shows the exact number of bits that were successfully delivered as well as those that did not get delivered to the end point node for a selected DLCI Data Delivery Success is measured in kilobits over time The color displayed indicates whether data are being delivered Color Indication Data that has been delivered successfully Data that has been dropped by the network CIR contracted Gold Local line speed Remote line speed When frames are being dropped compare this graph against the following graphs to determine the cause Transmit Bit Burst Analysis As CIR to see distribution of transmitted data in relation to the DLCI s CIR Transmit Frame Size Distribution to see the size of the packets that were transmitted May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Using the OpenLane NMS Transmit Frame Size Distribution Various service level agreement parameters may be based on frame size which may contribute to latency and frames being lost This graph shows the size of the packets being transmitted so you can compare frame size to your service level agreement Transmit Frame Size Distribution is measured over time in percent of all transmitted packets within each of the following ranges Color Packet Size in Bytes Less than or equal to 127 128 255
323. the System Configuration option settings determine how the FrameSaver unit operates The unit can be configured using m Menu driven user interface via a direct connection or Telnet session m DCE Manager based upon the following platforms HP OpenView Network Node Manager Unix HP OpenView for WorkGroup Node Manager for Windows IBM NetView AIX Changing the Auto Configuration setting can also change the unit s configuration See Setting Up Auto Configuration on page 8 10 for additional information Configuring System Options Select System to set the following options m Frame Relay and LMI Options below m Service Level Verification Options on page 8 25 m General Options like user initiated test time out test duration and clock source on page 8 26 8 22 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Configuring System Frame Relay and LMI Options Select Frame Relay and LMI to display or change the Frame Relay and LMI options for the system see Table 8 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration System Frame Relay and LMI Table 8 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 1 of 2 LMI Behavior Possible Settings Independent Port 1_ Follows Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 1 Port 1_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 Default Setting Independent Configures the network data port to allow the state of the LMI to be passed from one interface to another determining
324. the factory default setting Deletes all PVC Connections see Configuring PVC Connections on page 8 51 and Management PVC Connections see Configuring Management PVCs on page 8 57 involving this DLCI as the source or primary destination Deletes all excess DLCls on the user data port that were used only in deleted connections Changes DLCI Type from Multiplexed to Standard for the selected Network DLCI Configures the Network DLCI as a Management PVC see Configuring Management PVCs on page 8 57 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 47 Configuration Delete EDLCI Connections and Make a standard PVC to frame relay link DLCI nnnn lf you choose this selection the following actions occur Removes this DLCI on all PVC Connections see Table 8 10 PVC Connection Options and Management PVC Connections see Table 8 12 Management PVC Options Resets any Trap Manager Destination see Table 8 16 SNMP Traps Options or Default Network Destination see Table 8 11 Node IP Options that is configured for a Management PVC with this DLCI to the factory default setting Deletes all PVC Connections see Configuring PVC Connections on page 8 51 and Management PVC Connections see Configuring Management PVCs on page 8 57 involving this DLCI as the source or primary destination Deletes all excess DLCls other than frame relay link DLCI nnnn that were used only in deleted connections
325. the router and the FrameSaver unit to support RFC 1490 or Cisco encapsulation Typically this is done using a map or subinterface statement on the router If the FrameSaver unit is located with the NMS at the central site and in band management through the frame relay network Is desired to manage remote site units map statements must also be added to the router for the remote units Depending upon the router a single subinterface statement using a subnet may be used instead of multiple map statements The subinterface method assumes that all the FrameSaver units are on a different subnet than the endpoint routers See the Primary Link RIP options in Table 8 12 Management PVC Options in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for additional Inverse ARP and Standard RIP information 2 8 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Management Control Transparent Remote Management Control Using RFC 1490 Routers 9124 A2 GH30 00 FrameSaver unit A can be managed locally via in band management channels using a frame relay PVC that is configured on its DTE port When managing the FrameSaver unit B remotely FrameSaver unit A does not route IP traffic to FrameSaver unit B Instead IP traffic is transparently passed through FrameSaver unit A as part of customer data The router then routes the management data back to FrameSaver unit B on the dedicated management DLCI configured between the router and the DTE port of the FrameSaver unit The configurat
326. the selection Switch to the function keys area and select or enter a designated function key Example To save a configuration option change select Save S ors is the designated function key If a field is blank and the Message area displays valid selections press the spacebar the first valid setting for the field appears Continue pressing the spacebar to scroll through other possible settings 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 4 9 User Interface and Basic Operation 4 10 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Using the OpenLane NMS This chapter includes OpenLane Management features m Installation and Setup of the OpenLane DCE Manager and Performance Wizard on page 5 2 Viewing OpenLane Performance Wizard Graphs specific to FrameSaver SLV data collection and display on page 5 10 Creating OpenLane Service Level Management SLM Reports on page 5 26 OpenLane Performance Wizard includes Diagnostic Wizard a feature that allows you to setup run and monitor test results applicable to the system from a single screen Diagnostic Wizard information is incorporated into Chapter 11 Troubleshooting The OpenLane Advantage 9124 A2 GH30 00 OpenLane Management features Nondisruptive tests from OpenLane NMSs m Layers 1 2 and 3 monitoring Real time and historical focus m Diagnostic focus Alarm and operational status monitoring WAN errors and congestion monitoring Nondisruptive net
327. timing for the unit The clock source will not automatically switch from internal until the primary clock source returns May 1999 Preliminary 11 7 Troubleshooting Table 11 1 Alarm Conditions 4 of 4 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do Self Test Failure The unit did not pass its basic verification tests when it was powered up or reset SLV Timeout An excessive number of DLCI nnnn SLV communication frame_relay_link responses from the remote system have been missed on the specified multiplexed DLCI and link If the frame relay link is Neti FR1 the timeout is on the network FrameRly1 timeshot assignment Yellow Alarm at A yellow alarm signal is Network 1 being received on the specified interface The DTE has detected an LOS or OOF condition Yellow Alarm at DSX 1 11 8 May 1999 Preliminary 1 Reset the unit 2 Contact your service representative Verify that the network LMI is up If it is contact your network service provider For the network interface 1 Verify that the cable is securely attached at the Network interface 2 Contact your network provider For the DSX 1 interface 1 Check that the DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends Check the status of the attached equipment 9124 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Tables The unit is designed to provide you with many years of trouble free service If a problem occurs however r
328. ting PPP Specifies the link layer protocol to be used Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link see Table 8 17 Communication Port Options Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link PPP Point to Point Protocol SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol RIP Possible Settings None Proprietary Standard_out Default Setting None Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management data between devices Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link None No routing is used Proprietary A proprietary variant of RIP version 1 is used to communicate routing information only between devices to enable routing of IP traffic Standard_out The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing information about other FrameSaver units in the network Standard RIP messages received on this link are ignored NOTE The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the COM port configured as the management interface e g Cisco config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 ctl z WR To create this management interface make sure that Node or COM port IP Information has been set up see Configuring Node IP Information on page 8 11 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 75
329. tion is also shown lf errors occurred when transmitted data bursts exceeded line capacity looking at the Heaviest Users should indicate the DLCI s most responsible for the problem Once identified PVCs generating the greatest amount of traffic can be examined further B gt Procedure To immediately launch PVC graphs 1 From within a Heaviest Users graph or pie chart position the cursor over a DLCI segment 2 Press the right mouse button to display the menu 3 Select either the PVC Throughput or PVC Congestion graph or PVC Analysis if viewing the aggregated summary for the network interface See one of the following PVC Throughput for end to end connectivity between units at both ends of the PVC and to see the types of errors that are being recorded by each unit PVC Congestion for if the PVC is exceeding its contracted CIR and whether it is causing network congestion PVC Analysis for a more complete view of network traffic Only appears for a network interface 5 12 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Using the OpenLane NMS Frame Relay Physical Link Integrity Use this grouping of graphs to relate actual throughput on the frame relay link to the types of errors that are occurring It can also be used to verify that the network is operational and traffic is flowing normally Ermgorrd Framer 5 E ie F pas at ate CLEELAEEATELCEELEL EEE EH jiji Bibel Cie CP ret be 2 oe o Bp fetes
330. ton is selected but conversations are not supported Of the icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window the following are supported Traffic Statistics Protocol Statistics Traffic Monitor Protocol Monitor Segment Zoom Protocol Zoom Segment Details TopN Talkers Domain History All Talkers 1 Size distribution statistics are provided for a DLCI only not a link If a link is selected all size distribution statistics on the table or graph will be zero When a DLCI is selected the first and last size distribution statistics are ignored for FrameSaver units and the statistics for those buckets appear in the next valid bucket i e bucket size lt 64 and 64 statistics appear in the 65 127 bucket and gt 1518 Statistics appear in the 1024 1518 bucket Conversations and Long Term and Short Term Histories are not supported in this release As a result no data will appear on windows that include these panes 6 20 May 1999 Preliminary Concord s Network Health FrameSaver units are compatible with Concord Communication s Network Health software In addition Network Health has released the first in a series of software modules that integrates FrameSaver SLV enhanced performance statistics into its reporting package see the At a Glance report on page 7 19 To get this report you need Network Health R4 01 or higher This chapter includes Network Health information as it relates to FrameSaver
331. trap format standards and special trap features including RMON specific traps and the default settings that will generate RMON specific SNMP traps NOTE Be sure to choose an operational link for the default Should the default link become disabled unrouteable traps will be discarded To Set the configuration option Enable sending of SNMP trap SNMP Traps to Enable messages Specify the number of SNMP Number of SNMP Managers to the desired managers that will receive SNMP trap number maximum of 6 of SNMP messages from the FrameSaver unit managers to receive SNMP traps Specify an IP address for each SNMP NMS n IP Address to the IP address that manager specified in the Number of identifies each SNMP manager s indicated SNMP Managers configuration option in the Number of SNMP Managers configuration option Specify the network destination for Destination to one of the following the Trap Manager Default COM PVCname Select the type of SNMP trap General Traps to enable or disable messages to be sent from the warmStart and authenticationFailure FrameSaver unit traps Enterprise Specific Traps to enable or disable enterpriseSpecific traps Link Traps to enable or disable linkDown and linkUp traps Link and DLCI Traps Interfaces to specify which interfaces will generate linkDown linkUp and enterpriseSpecific traps RMON traps 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 67 Configuration 8 68 Table 8
332. ts This appendix includes the following sections MIBs Support on page C 2 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps on page C 2 Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps on page C 3 Trap warmStart on page C 3 Trap authenticationFailure on page C 4 Traps linkUp and linkDown on page C 4 Traps enterprise Specific on page C 7 Traps RMON Specific on page C 13 RMON Alarm Defaults on page C 14 Static Frame Relay Interface Alarm Defaults on page C 16 Dynamic Frame Relay Interface Alarm Defaults on page C 18 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area on page C 19 Static DLC Alarm Defaults NetScout Area on page C 20 Dynamic DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area on page C 21 m Object ID OID Cross Reference Numeric Order on page C 22 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary Ce SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults MIB Support The NextEDGE unit supports the SNMP Version 1 and has the capability of being managed by any industry standard SNMP manager and accessed by external SNMP managers using SNMP protocol The following MIBs are supported MIB II RFC 1213 and RFC 1573 Frame Relay DTEs MIB RFC 2115 DS1 E1 MIB RFC 1406 RS 232 Like MIB RFC 1659 Frame Relay Service MIB RFC 1604 Enterprise MIB RMON Version 1 MIB RFC 1757 RMON Version 2 MIB RFC 2021 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps Paradyne standard and enterprise MIBs are available from the Paradyne World Wide
333. ts must also be added to the router for the remote units Depending upon the router a single subinterface statement using a subnet may be used instead of multiple map statements The subinterface method assumes that all the FrameSaver units are on a different subnet than the endpoint routers See the Primary Link RIP options in Table 8 12 Management PVC Options in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for additional Inverse ARP and Standard RIP information 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 2 5 Management Control Creating a Separate Management Link Via the COM Port A dedicated PVC can be configured to carry customer data over the DTE port while management data is carried over the COM port The illustration below shows a management link connected to the COM port for local access to a non RFC 1490 router The router must have an asynchronous interface running PPP or SLIP link layer protocol When the COM port is configured as the IP management link the async user interface is accessible via Telnet Once the interface is configured it operates like an IP interface so it can be PINGed used for SNMP Traps FTP and Telnet Although not shown in the illustration below an external LAN adapter can be connected to the COM port to provide Ethernet connectivity User Data User DCE Data FrameSaver Unit Frame Relay Port Port WAN Link NTU ERRA Router or EED TET Relay Terminal Server AUX COM Network N
334. tus Messages 9124 A2 GH30 00 These messages appear in the left column of the System and Test Status screen or the highest priority Health and Status message appears on the last line at the bottom of the screen right corner Table 10 6 Health and Status Messages 1 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do AIS at DSX 1 An Alarm Indication Signal Check the DTE attached to the AIS is received by the DSX 1 interface DSX 1 interface AIS is an unframed all ones signal AIS at Network An Alarm Indication Signal Report problem to carrier AIS is received by the network interface AIS is an unframed all ones signal The network is transmitting an AIS Auto Configuration feature is active which allows automatic configuration and cross connection of DLCls as they are reported by the network LMI Auto Configuration Active No action needed unless you want to disable this feature Back to Back Mode is Active The operating mode has been configured for back to back Control Change Operating Mode No action needed unless you want to disable this feature This feature is useful for product demonstrations or for a point to point configuration using a leased line The FrameSaver unit can be connected to another FrameSaver unit without a frame relay switch between them See Back to Back Operation in Chapter 3
335. tus and configuration option information Level 3 Allows limited access with monitoring control only The user can monitor and display status and configuration screens only May 1999 Preliminary 8 73 Configuration 8 74 Table 8 17 Communication Port Options 3 of 4 Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity no keyboard activity Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal NOTE Changing this setting does not affect the current session it changes all subsequent sessions Enable Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity Disable Does not disconnect user session Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the session is disconnected Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal NOTE Changing this setting does not affect the current session it changes all subsequent sessions 1 60 Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes inclusive IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the COM port Only in effect when the COM port is co
336. twork DLCI 201 EDLCI 0 Manag ement 1MPort Internal Mgmt201 EDLCI2 EDLCI2 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 3 11 Typical Applications The following example shows the 1 port nonmanagement configuration 1Port FrameSaver Unit DTE DLCI 201 Frame o i aiai a a Relay Port 1 Network J User Side Contains 1 EDLCI Network Side of LMI of LMI Port 1 Physical Connection PVC Connection Ha FR Discovery Source Source Destination Destination Destination Mode Selection Interface DLCI Interface Link DLCI EDLCI One port with Port 1 DLCI 201 Network DLCI 201 EDLCI 0 No Management 1 Port Back to Back Operation 3 12 Back to back operation can be achieved by connecting two FrameSaver units using a network crossover cable as in a test bench setup or a point to point configuration using a leased line This configuration is useful for private frame relay networks or for demonstrations when a frame relay circuit is not available This feature is for dry copper applications only when there are no frame relay switches at either end This configuration is shown in the illustration below T1 Crossover Frame FrameSaver FrameSaver Frame Relay Unit Unit Relay Router Router 98 16238 Using this feature one FrameSaver unit must be configured for Back to Back operation so it presents the network side of the UNI and provides network timing from its internal clock The othe
337. ughput Errored Frames LMI Signaling Errors and Unknown Protocol Frames DS1 Physical Link Integrity T1 Devices Only Error Free Seconds Errored Seconds and Transmission Errors DS1 Physical Link Diagnostics T1 Devices Only Error Free Seconds Errored Seconds and Transmission Errors PVC Throughput Transmit and Receive Frame Relay DLCI Congestion Capacity Throughput and Congestion PVC Data Delivery Analysis Transmit Bit Burst Analysis As CIR Round Trip Network Latency End to End Data Delivery Success and Transmit Frame Size Distribution Status and error messages appear in the messages area at the bottom of Performance Wizard windows If an error message appears try and resynchronize with the FrameSaver unit The following sections show and discuss the frame relay windows that can be accessed when monitoring a FrameSaver SLV unit Refer to the OpenLane Performance Wizard User s Guide or the Help feature for additional information May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Using the OpenLane NMS Frame Relay Access Channel Aggregated Summary For a complete view of an interface s traffic this graph summary brings together the information needed to determine how well an interface s or link s capability is being utilized This set of graphs is provided for the network and data ports For the FrameSaver 9124 it is also available for the T1 interface File Ui Pilp integelby
338. unity name must be supplied B gt Procedure To assign SNMP community names and access levels 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management The General SNMP Management Options screen appears 2 Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Assign SNMP community names Community Name 1 and Community Name 2 to a community name text up to 255 characters in length Assign the type of access allowed Name 1 Access and Name 2 Access to Read for the SNMP community names or Read Write 3 Save your changes See Configuring SNMP Management in Chapter 8 Configuration Options for more information about General SNMP Management configuration options 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 9 7 Security and Logins Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses The FrameSaver unit provides an additional level of security by Limiting the IP addresses of the NMSs that can access the FrameSaver unit Performing validation checks on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the FrameSaver unit m Specifying the access allowed for the authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed The SNMP NMS Security Options screen provides the configuration options that determine whether security checking is performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems atte
339. ured for Net Link OOF at DSX 1 An Out of Frame OOF Cleared when a reframe occurs condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface 1 Incompatible framing 1 Check that the framing format format between the DTE for the DSX 1 DTE interface and the FrameSaver is correct ale 2 Check that the DSX 1 cable is 2 DSX 1 cabling problem securely attached at both ends 10 16 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 10 6 Health and Status Messages 5 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do OOF at Network n An Out of Frame OOF Cleared when a reframe occurs condition is detected on the network interface 1 Check that the framing format Primary Clock Failed Primary amp Secondary Clock Failed Yellow at DSX 1 Yellow at Network n 9124 A2 GH30 00 1 Incompatible framing format between the network and the FrameSaver unit 2 Network cabling problem 3 T1 facility problem A failure of the primary clock source configured for the NAM is detected and the secondary clock is providing the timing for the NAM This condition clears when the configured primary clock is restored A failure of the primary and secondary clock sources configured for the FrameSaver unit are detected and the internal clock is providing the timing for the unit The clock source will not automatically switch from internal until the primary clock source returns A yellow alarm si
340. uring installation of the central site FrameSaver unit The remote FrameSaver unit must have configured the SNMP trap managers to be sent the Ping Select Procedure 2 on page 11 26 to Ping the SNMP trap managers B gt Procedure 1 To Ping any far end FrameSaver unit 1 Select the IP Ping test Main Menu gt Test gt IP Ping 2 Enter the IP Address of the device the Ping is being sent to then select Start NOTE If the FrameSaver unit has just initialized or the far end unit has just initialized it may take about a minute for the units to learn the routes via the proprietary RIP 3 Verify the results of the IP Ping test While the test is running In Progress is displayed in the Status field When the test is finished Alive Latency nn ms should appear as the Status nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds If any other message is displayed additional testing will be required 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 11 25 Troubleshooting 11 26 B gt Procedure 2 To Ping the NMS at the central site 1 Verify that the central site NMS has the FrameSaver unit s IP address in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit 2 Verify that the central site NMS s router has the FrameSaver unit s IP address in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit 3 Verify that the central site NMS has been configured as an SNMP Trap Manager if th
341. utbound Management Priority Index P Point to Point PPP Routing Information RIP packet capture uploading data 10 40 Serial Line IP SLIP age a Simple Network Management SNMP arity 8 support 1 3 Password PVC pattern connection status 10 21 hice connections tests creating Payload Loopback 11 20 total number performance statistics data delivery analysis Performance Wizard Management copying directory 6 3 total number dedicated graphs 5 10 multiplexing installation and setup name BMS support Network Loopback 11 17 physical tests _ yea throughput eee A troubleshooting problems 11 11 pin assignments COM port Q to LAN cable Port 1 V 35 connector T1 line interface cable T1 network cable D 8 QoS quality of service Quick Reference 8 6 V 35 crossover cable D 7 R Ping test 11 25 pre eeu ranges setting frame and burst Port ratios FDR and DDR DTE Initiated Loopbacks 8 34 remote Access Level loopbacks 11 22 aggregation management connections total number communication options 8 71 PVC connections total number Use 8 71 units PPP minimal configuration Primary Clock on same subnet Failed using different i B Source using direct PVCs Primary Frame Relay Link using ours ee Primary Link RIP Repeater Loopback 11 21 printed reports reports product related documents Network Health Proprietary R
342. uter and Unit Via the DTE Port on page 2 5 Creating a Separate Management Link Via the COM Port on page 2 6 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Management Control Creating a Management DLCI Between the Router and Unit Via the DTE Port The following configuration shows the management connection using an RFC 1490 compliant or Cisco frame relay IP router connected to the FrameSaver unit s user data port As shown below in band management is accomplished through the dedicated PVC between the frame relay router or FRAD and the FrameSaver unit Management Data Frame Relay REC 1490 Customer Data IP Router FrameSaver Unit Y WAN Link Frame Relay Network e 2 Configured PVCs 1 for Management Data 1 for Customer Data e 1 Cable Physical Connection PVC Connection 98 15860 In this configuration the FrameSaver unit depends on the router for management connectivity User data PVCs share the same port as the management PVC No additional cables need to be purchased NOTE The router to be used for management must configure a local PVC between the router and the FrameSaver unit to support RFC 1490 or Cisco encapsulation Typically this is done using a map or subinterface statement on the router If the FrameSaver unit is located with the NMS at the central site and in band management through the frame relay network is desired to manage remote site units map statemen
343. vents General Traps trap warranty A web browsers Web site access to documentation glossary Paradyne A Y Yellow Alarm alarm condition Alarm Signal at Network 10 17 IN 12 March 1999 9124 A2 GH30 00
344. when the FrameSaver unit is in sync An Out of Syne message appears when 5 frames out of 25 are missing or out of Sequence These error counts are updated every second If the maximum count is reached 99999 appears in these fields Connectivity The Connectivity test is only available for multiplexed DLCls Connectivity is a proprietary method that determines whether the FrameSaver unit node at the other end of the frame relay PVC is active This test stops automatically and can only be executed for multiplexed PVCs Main Menu gt Test gt Network PVC Tests Port 1 PVC Tests gt Connectivity Selecting Connectivity sends a frame to the FrameSaver unit at the other end of the PVC ARndTrip Time ms message appears in the Result column when a response is received within 5 seconds indicating that the FrameSaver unit at the remote end is alive operational and connected and the round trip RT time is shown in milliseconds ms with a resolution of 1 ms If a response is not received within 5 seconds No Response appears in the Result column 11 18 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Physical Tests Line Loopback 9124 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting Physical Tests can be commanded for any of the following interfaces m Network m DSX 1 Port 1 Physical tests require the participation of your network service provider CAUTION You should not run these tests with frame relay equipment attached you must disconnec
345. which the data file is transferred is the rate set by the FTP MaxReceive Rate Kbps option see the FTP Max Receive Rate Kbps configuration option in Table 8 14 Telnet and FTP Session Options in Chapter 8 Configuration NOTE Use your NMS application to FTP and view statistics and packet data Data files are not in user readable format B gt Procedure To retrieve data 1 Perform Steps 1 through 3 in Upgrading System Software on page 10 38 to initiate and set up an FTP session 1 Initiate an FTP session to the device from which SLY statistics will be retrieved 2 Type cd data to change to the data directory If the retrieving SLV statistics Perform a get of the uhbcfull dat file a File Transfer Complete Transfer was successful File Transfer Failed Transfer was not successful Try again or end the session LMI packet capture data Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility Main Menu Control gt LMI Packet Capture Utility LMI packet capture data is not available readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is Active Perform a get of the Imitrace syc file One of the following will display for the file File Transfer Complete File Transfer Failed Permission Denied The LMI Packet Capture Utility was not readable Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility and try again 3 Close the FTP session SLV statistics and or LMI Packet Capture data are now available for reporting i
346. with management data frames with user data frames is a proprietary method that is patented When using this method The first EDLCI EDLCI 0 is used for the Port 1 data and no overhead is associated with the multiplexing for EDLCI 0 Subsequent DLCls have two bytes of overhead associated with them A diagnostic EDLCI which is transparent to the user is also created on each multiplexed DLCI on the network interface This allows nondisruptive PVC diagnostic tests to be run as well as end to end communication of network latency topology and data delivery information A management EDLCI EDLCI 2 is created to route management data through the network interface This allows for nondisruptive multiplexing of management data with user data and provides router independent management of remote units To use this feature the network DLCI Type must be Multiplexed 3 10 May 1999 Preliminary 9124 A2 GH30 00 Typical Applications Using Auto Configuration When the Frame Relay Discovery feature is used DLCI configuration and PVC connection occur automatically Based upon the network LMI status response message the FrameSaver unit discovers network DLCls and captures the network s CIR committed information rate provided the network switch supports this feature e g Stratacom switch DLCI plus CIR Network and Port interface DLCls with the same number are created and connected automatically All automatically configured
347. work integrity checks and latency tests Capacity analysis Throughput utilization Data delivery and congestion analysis Patent pending PVC Data Delivery Analysis m Service level accounting and quality of service verification May 1999 Preliminary 5 1 Using the OpenLane NMS Using an OpenLane NMS Application For additional information about accessing and managing the FrameSaver SLV unit through OpenLane DCE Manager and OpenLane Performance Wizard and for hardware and software requirements necessary to support these applications refer to the m OpenLane DCE Manager User s Guide to help you set up and configure devices and their interfaces and monitor operate and perform diagnostic testing using the Unix based management application OpenLane DCE Manager for HP OpenView for Windows User s Guide to help you set up and configure devices and their interfaces and monitor operate and perform diagnostic testing using the Windows based management application OpenLane Performance Wizard User s Guide to query devices for both real time and historical data and to display graphs Installation and Setup of DCE Manager OpenLane DCE Manager is used in conjunction with HP OpenView or NetView and if performance graphs are wanted used with OpenLane Performance Wizard as well When adding FrameSaver SLV units to your network follow the procedures provided in the appropriate DCE Manager User s Guide Install
348. xShort MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTxDiscards MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLink TotRxErrs MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLink TotTxErrs MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTxUnderruns 9124 A2 GH30 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table C 7 Object ID Cross Reference 2 of 3 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx Nonoctet Aligns MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Rx CRC Errors MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Total LMI Errors MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLink TotalLMIErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D DLCI Inactive Seconds MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtDiciStsInactiveSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 1 D Missing Latency Responses MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtDiciMissedSLVs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 6 1 D Congested Seconds MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtDliciStsCongestedSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Frames Dropped by Network MIB devfrext mib E Tag frFrExtDiciNetDropFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 7 1 D Current Latency MIB devfrext mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest
349. xcept for the management PVC between a data port and router This is so communication with the unit remains If No n is entered no previously discovered or manually configured DLCls or PVC connections are removed and newly discovered DLCls will be configured according to the new discovery mode NOTE If non FrameSaver units are at the other end of a PVC connection PVC diagnostic tests are disruptive to data Only FrameSaver units currently support PVC multiplexing and nondisruptive PVC diagnostics 9124 A2 GH30 00 May 1999 Preliminary 8 11 Configuration B gt Procedure To select a Frame Relay Discovery mode 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Auto Configuration Frame Relay Discovery Mode 2 Select a Frame Relay Discovery mode Discovery Mode Application Description 1MPort Auto configuration is enabled on Port 1 default A management DLCI is configured A multiplexed network DLCI containing two EDLCls is configured for Port 1 user data and for management data A PVC connection is configured between the network and port DLCls Auto configuration is enabled on Port 1 No management DLCI is configured A multiplexed network DLCI is configured for Port 1 user data A PVC connection is configured between the network and port DLCls NetOnly Auto configuration of a network DLCI only no Port 1 or PVC connections are configured No Port 1 PVC connection or management DLCI is con
350. xl About This Guide Section Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Index Description Concord s Network Health Describes setup and related windows and identifies those reports that apply to the FrameSaver unit Configuration Provides instructions for setting up the unit including how to enter identity information and set up the date and time on the screens Also provides instructions for configuring the unit along with full descriptions of each option and possible settings Security and Logins Provides procedures for controlling access to the FrameSaver SLV and setting up logins Operation and Maintenance Provides procedures to display unit identification information and to display and interpret status and statistical information Troubleshooting Provides troubleshooting and test procedures Menu Hierarchy Contains a graphical representation of how the user interface screens are organized IP Addressing Provides guidelines for selecting an IP addressing scheme and shows examples of typical schemes with subnet masks assigned SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Identifies the MIBs supported and how they can be downloaded describes the unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features and describes the RMON specific user history groups and alarm and
351. you can set up two FrameSaver units that are connected back to back without frame relay switches between them as in a test bench setup This configuration is shown in the illustration below T1 Crossover Frame FrameSaver FrameSaver Frame Relay Unit Unit Relay Router Router 98 16238 Changing Operating Mode 9124 A2 GH30 00 When setting up back to back operation One unit must be configured for Standard operation which is the setting for normal operation The other unit must be configured for Back to Back operation so it presents the network side of the UNI Only one of the units will have its operating mode changed B gt Procedure To set up back to back operation 1 On the unit to be configured for Back to Back operation manually configure DLCls DLCls should be configured before connecting the two units 2 Access the Change Operating Mode screen Main Menu gt Control Change Operating Mode The Change Operating Mode screen appears with two modes Select Back to Back Operation and type y Yes at the Are you sure prompt Press Ctrl a and Save the change B gt Procedure To return the unit to normal operation 1 Return to the Change Operating Mode screen and switch the Operating Mode back to Standard Respond Yes to the prompt and save the change The units can be reconnected to a standard frame relay network May 1999 Preliminary 8 21 Configuration Configuring

Manual - Optimum Data Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents